You are on page 1of 248

CODE FOR

ENVIRONMENTAL
SUSTAINABILITYOFBUILDINGS
3rd Edition

The Code for Environmental Sustainability of Buildings, 3rd Edition


is electronically published by the Building and Construction Authority.
Building and Construction Authority, October 2012
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced
or transmitted in any form or by any means, without permission
in writing from the publisher.

CODEFOR

ENVIRONMENTAL
SUSTAINABILITY
OFBUILDINGS
rd

3 Edition

October2012

Contents
CODE FOR ENVIRONMENTAL SUSTAINABILITY OF BUILDINGS
Introduction .. 1
1

Scope .. 2

Definitions ... 2

Statutory Requirements . 3

Compliance Method . . 4

Submission Procedures .... 42

ANNEX
A

Areas of Responsibility .. 45

Scoring Methodology & Documentation

B-1 Residential Building Criteria .. 50

B-2 Non-Residential Building Criteria .....101

B-3 Non-Residential Building Criteria for Transit Station .....195

Ventilation Simulation Methodology & Requirements............ 235

Daylighting & Glare Simulation Methodology and Requirements............ 239

INTRODUCTION
The intent of this Code for Environmental Sustainability of Buildings (referred to as this Code) is to
establish environmentally friendly practices for the planning, design and construction of buildings,
which would help to mitigate the environmental impact of built structures.
This Code sets out the minimum environmental sustainability standard for buildings and the
administrative requirements. It has largely adopted the BCA Green Marks criteria as the compliance
method in assessing the environmental performance of a building development.
This Code is not intended to abridge safety, health, environmental or related requirements contained
in other applicable laws, codes or policies administered by relevant authorities. Where there is a
conflict between a requirement of this Code and such other laws affecting the design and
construction of the building, precedence shall be determined by the relevant authorities.
If you need clarification on any aspect of this Code, please contact the Building and Construction
Authority, Singapore.

SCOPE

This Code sets out the minimum environmental sustainability standard for buildings and the
administrative requirements. It includes the compliance method for determining the level of
environmental performance of a building development.
The provisions of this Code shall apply to :
a.

All new building works which involve a gross floor area of 2,000 m2 or more;

b.

Additions or extensions to existing buildings which involve increasing the gross floor area of
the existing buildings by 2,000 m2 or more;

c.

Building works which involve major retrofitting to existing buildings with gross floor area of
2,000 m2 or more.

The referenced codes, standards and other documents referred in this Code shall be considered part
of the requirements of this Code to the extent as prescribed.

DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this Code, the following definitions shall apply:
Dwelling Unit

A unit within residential development that provides complete,


independent living facilities for one or more person.

Design System Efficiency


(DSE)

The energy efficiency of building cooling system designed to


meet the operating condition and requirement in providing an
acceptable indoor thermal environment. It is a measure of how
efficiently the cooling system would operate during building
operation and its computation is to be based on the
methodology spelled out in this Standard.

Green Mark Score

The score for environmental performance of buildings


computed in accordance with the criteria and scoring
methodology set out in this code.

Gross Floor Area (GFA)

The gross floor area (GFA) is calculated using the definition by


the Urban Redevelopment Authority (URA).

Major Retrofitting

The provision, extension or substantial alteration of the building


envelope and building services in or in connection with an
existing building.

Minimum Green Mark


Score

The lowest Green Mark score that would meet the minimum
level of environmental performance required for buildings.

In instances where terms are not expressly stated in this Code and are defined in other referenced
documents, such terms shall have the meanings as determined in those documents.

STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS
3.1

Act and Regulations


The following Act and Regulations have relevance:
a. The Building Control Act
b. The Building Control Regulations
c. The Building Control (Environmental Sustainability) Regulations

3.2

Referenced Codes and Standards


The following codes and standards have relevance:
a. Code on Envelope Thermal Performance for Buildings
b. SS 530

- Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency Standard for Building


Services and Equipment

c. SS 531-1 - Code of Practice for Lighting of Work Places - Indoor


d. SS 553

- Code of Practice for Air-Conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation


in Buildings

e. SS 554

- Code of Practice for Indoor Air Quality for Air-Conditioned Buildings

f. SS CP 38 - Code of Practice for Artificial Lighting in Buildings


g. AHRI Standard 550/590 - Performance Rating of Water Chilling Packages using the
Vapour Compression Cycle
h. ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise
Residential Buildings
i. ASHRAE Guideline 22 - Instrumentation for Monitoring Central Chilled Water Plant
Efficiency

3.3

Responsibility
The developer or building owner shall engage a Qualified Person and other
appropriate practitioners to ensure that the building works are designed with physical
features or amenities, and may be carried out using methods and materials to meet
the minimum environmental sustainability standard stipulated in Building Control
(Environmental Sustainability) Regulations.
The QP who submits the building plan shall be overall responsible for ensuring that the
minimum environmental sustainability standard is met. The QP together with the other
appropriate practitioners (i.e. PE (Mechanical) and PE (Electrical)) shall be responsible
for assessing and scoring the building works under their charge. The areas of
responsibility are as prescribed in Annex A of this Code.

3.4

Minimum Environmental Sustainability Standard


3.4.1 The minimum environmental sustainability standard of building works shall
have a level of environmental performance that meets the minimum Green
Mark score and the stipulated pre-requisite requirements.

3.4.2 The minimum Green Mark score for building works related to a residential
building is 50 points. Similarly, the minimum Green Mark score for building
works related to a non-residential building is also 50 points.
3

3.4.3 For mixed-use buildings consisting of residential and non-residential buildings,


the Green Mark score will be based on the compliance with both residential
and non-residential building criteria. The Green Mark scores for the respective
building categories should meet at least 50 points. For smaller projects where
the GFA of either building category is less than 2000 m2, the computation of
the Green Mark score can be based solely on the appropriate assessment
criteria for the one with larger applicable GFA as summarised in Table 3.4.3.
Table 3.4.3 : Applicable Criteria for Mixed-Use Building with GFA 2000 m2
Project
Type

Mixed-Use
Building

Total New GFA


Residential
(m2)

Total New GFA


Non-Residential
(m2)

GM Score
Residential
Applicable

GM Score
Non-Residential
Applicable

2000

2000

Yes

Yes

2000

< 2000

Yes

No

< 2000

2000

No

Yes

< 2000

< GFA for


Residential

Yes

No

< GFA for


Non-Residential

< 2000

No

Yes

3.4.4 The building works shall also meet all the relevant mandatory requirements
regulated under Part IV of the Building Control Regulations 2003.

COMPLIANCE METHOD
4.1

Environmental Sustainability Standard


4.1.1 The environmental sustainability standard of building development shall be
determined by the level of environmental performance and the numerical
scores (i.e Green Mark points) achieved in accordance with the degree of
compliance with the applicable criteria using the scoring methodology and the
prerequisite requirements as specified in this Code. There are basically two
sets of criteria namely the Residential Building Criteria and Non-Residential
Building Criteria. The framework and point allocations for the respective
assessment criteria are as illustrated in Table 4.1.1(a), (b)(i) and (b)(ii).

4.1.2 The criteria consist of five(5) environmental impact categories namely :


(a) Part 1 Energy Efficiency : This category focuses on the approach that can
be used in the building design and system selection to optimise the energy
performance of buildings.

(b) Part 2 Water Efficiency : This category focuses on the selection of water
efficient fittings and features that would reduce the use of potable water
during building operations.
(c) Part 3 Environmental Protection : This category focuses on the design,
practices and selection of materials and resources that would reduce the
environmental impacts of built structures.
(d) Part 4 Indoor Environmental Quality : This category focuses on the design
strategies that would enhance the indoor environmental quality which
includes air quality, thermal comfort, acoustic control and daylighting.

(e) Part 5 Other Green Features : This category focuses on the adoption of
green practices and new technologies that are innovative and have
potential environmental benefits.
4

Table 4.1.1(a) : Framework and Point Allocations for Residential Building Criteria
Category
(I)

Point Allocations

Energy Related Requirements

Minimum 30 points

Part 1 : Energy Efficiency


RB 1-1
RB 1-2
RB 1-3
RB 1-4
RB 1-5
RB 1-6
RB 1-7
RB 1-8

Thermal Performance of Building Envelope RETV


Naturally Ventilated Design and Air-Conditioning System
Daylighting
Artificial Lighting
Ventilation in Carparks
Lifts
Energy Efficient Features
Renewable Energy

Category Score for Part 1 Energy Efficiency


(II) Other Green Requirements

15
22
6
10
6
1
7
20
87 (Max)

Part 2 : Water Efficiency


RB 2-1 Water Efficient Fittings
RB 2-2 Water Usage Monitoring
RB 2-3 Irrigation System and Landscaping

10
1
3

Category Score for Part 2 Water Efficiency

14

Minimum 20 points

Part 3 : Environmental Protection


RB 3-1
RB 3-2
RB 3-3
RB 3-4
RB 3-5
RB 3-6

Sustainable Construction
Sustainable Products
Greenery Provision
Environmental Management Practice
Green Transport
Stormwater Management

10
8
8
8
4
3

Category Score for Part 3 Environmental Protection

41

Part 4 : Indoor Environmental Quality


RB 4-1
RB 4-2
RB 4-3
RB 4-4

Noise Level
Indoor Air Pollutants
Waste Disposal
Indoor Air Quality in Wet Areas

1
2
1
2

Category Score for Part 4 Indoor Environmental Quality

Part 5 : Other Green Features


RB 5-1 Green Features & Innovations

Category Score for Part 5 Other Green Features

7
Green Mark Score :

155

4.1.3 These environmental impact categories are broadly classified under two main
groupings namely (I) Energy Related Requirements and (II) Other Green
Requirements.

4.1.4 Energy Related Requirements consist of Part 1- Energy Efficiency where points
are allocated for the various energy efficient designs, practices and features
used. A minimum of 30 points must be obtained from this group to meet the
minimum environmental sustainability standard.

4.1.5 Other Green Requirements consist of Part 2 Water Efficiency, Part 3


Environmental Protection, Part 4 Indoor Environmental Quality and Part 5
Other Green Features. Points are allocated for the water efficient features,
environmentally friendly design practices and innovative green features used.
A minimum of 20 points must be obtained from this grouping to comply with the
minimum environmental sustainability standard.
5

Table 4.1.1(b)(i) : Framework and Point Allocations for Non-Residential Building Criteria
Category
(I)

Point Allocations

Energy Related Requirements


Part 1 : Energy Efficiency
NRB 1-1 Thermal Performance of Building Envelope - ETTV
NRB 1-2 Air-Conditioning System
Sub-Total (A) NRB 1-1 to 1-2

Section (A) Applicable


to air-con areas

NRB 1-3 Building Envelope Design/Thermal Parameters

Section (B) Applicable


to non air-con areas
excluding carparks and
common areas

Minimum 30 points

NRB 1-4 Natural Ventilation / Mechanical Ventilation


Sub-Total (B) NRB 1-3 to 1-4
NRB 1-5 Daylighting
NRB 1-6 Artificial Lighting
NRB 1-7 Ventilation in Carparks
NRB 1-8 Ventilation in Common Areas
NRB 1-9 Lifts and Escalators
NRB 1-10 Energy Efficient Practices & Features
NRB 1-11 Renewable Energy

Section (C) Generally


applicable to all areas

Sub-Total (C) NRB 1-5 to 1-11


Category Score for Part 1 Energy Efficiency
Prorate Subtotal (A) + Prorate Subtotal (B) + Prorate Subtotal (C)

12
30
42
35
20
55
6
12
4
5
2
12
20
61
116 (Max)

(II) Other Green Requirements


Part 2 : Water Efficiency
NRB 2-1 Water Efficient Fittings
NRB 2-2 Water Usage and Leak Detection
NRB 2-3 Irrigation System and Landscaping

10
2
3

NRB 2-4 Water Consumption of Cooling Towers

Category Score for Part 2 Water Efficiency

17

Minimum 20 points

Part 3 : Environmental Protection


NRB 3-1
NRB 3-2
NRB 3-3
NRB 3-4
NRB 3-5
NRB 3-6
NRB 3-7

Sustainable Construction
Sustainable Products
Greenery Provision
Environmental Management Practice
Green Transport
Refrigerants
Stormwater Management

10
8
8
7
4
2
3

Category Score for Part 3 Environmental Protection

42

Part 4 : Indoor Environmental Quality


NRB 4-1 Thermal Comfort
NRB 4-2 Noise Level
NRB 4-3 Indoor Air Pollutants
NRB 4-4 Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management
NRB 4-5 High Frequency Ballasts
Category Score for Part 4 Indoor Environmental Quality

1
1
2
2
2
8

Part 5 : Other Green Features


NRB 5-1 Green Features & Innovations

Category Score for Part 5 Other Green Features

7
Green Mark Score :

190 (Max)

Table 4.1.1(b)(ii) : Framework and Point Allocations for Non-Residential - Transit Stations
Category
(I)

Point Allocations

Energy Related Requirements

Minimum 30 points

Part 1 : Energy Efficiency

(III)

ST 1-1 Environmental Control Systems

27

ST 1-2 Lighting Systems

12

ST 1-3 Electrical Services

ST 1-4 Lifts and Escalators

3.5

ST 1-5 Energy Efficient Features

7.5

Category Score for Part 1 Energy Efficiency

57

Other Green Requirements


Part 2 : Water Efficiency
ST 2-1 Water Efficient Fittings

ST 2-2 Water Usage Monitoring

1.5

ST 2-3 Water Consumption of Cooling Towers

3.5

Category Score for Part 2 Water Efficiency

11

Minimum 20 points

Part 3 : Environmental Protection


ST 3-1 Sustainable Construction

ST 3-2 Sustainable Products

ST 3-3 Greenery Provision

ST 3-4 Site Selection

ST 3-5 Environmental Management Practice

ST 3-6 Public Transport Accessibility

15

ST 3-7 Refrigerants

Category Score for Part 3 Environmental Protection

41

Part 4 : Indoor Environmental Quality


ST 4-1 Thermal Comfort

ST 4-2 Indoor Air Pollutants

ST 4-3 Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management

Category Score for Part 4 Indoor Environmental Quality

Part 5 : Other Green Features


ST 5-1 Green Features & Innovations

Category Score for Part 5 Other Green Features

6
Green Mark Score (Max) :

120

4.1.6 The Green Mark score of the building design is the total of all the numerical
scores (i.e. Green Mark points) assigned based on the degree of compliance
with the applicable criteria listed in Table 4.1.6(a), (b)(i) and (b)(ii) and the
scoring methodology stated in Annex B. In addition to the Green Mark Score,
the relevant pre-requisite requirements stated in paragraph 4.1.7 and 4.1.8 are
to be complied with.

4.1.7 Under the non-residential building criteria, the environmental impact category
Part 1 Energy Efficiency applies to both air-conditioned and non airconditioned spaces. Where there is a combination of air-conditioned and
non air-conditioned spaces, the points allocated are to be prorated in
accordance with the respective floor areas. For simplicity, points applicable to
air-conditioned areas are accounted only if the aggregate air-conditioned areas
exceed 500 m2. Similarly, points applicable to non air-conditioned areas are
7

accounted only if the aggregate non air-conditioned areas are more than 10%
of the total floor areas excluding carparks and common areas.

4.1.8 For non-residential buildings with air-conditioned spaces, there are two
prerequisite requirements that are to be complied with, as outlined in the
following :
(a) Minimum Design System Efficiency (DSE) of building cooling systems :
(i) For Buildings using Water Cooled Chilled-Water Plant:
Peak Building Cooling Load (RT)

Minimum Design
System Efficiency
(DSE) for Central
Chilled-Water Plant

< 500

500
(1)

Design System Efficiency


0.80

(kW/RT)

0.70

(ii) For Buildings using Air Cooled Chilled-Water Plant or Unitary


Air-Conditioners:
Peak Building Cooling Load (RT)

Minimum Design
System Efficiency
(DSE) for Air Cooled
Chilled-Water Plant or
Unitary AirConditioners

< 500

500

Design System Efficiency(1) (kW/RT)


0.90

0.80

Note (1) The efficiency of the overall air-conditioning system shall meet its design system
efficiency as well as the corresponding minimum DSE stipulated for the respective airconditioning system during the building operating hours specified below:
Office Buildings:
Monday to Friday : 9 a.m. to 6 p.m.

Hotels:
Monday to Sunday : 24 Hours

Retail Malls :
Monday to Sunday :10 a.m. to 9 p.m.

Other Building Types:


To be determined based on
operating hours

(b) Instrumentation for monitoring water cooled chilled-water plant efficiency to


be provided in accordance with the following requirement:
(i) The installed instrumentation shall have the capability to calculate a resultant
plant efficiency (i.e. kW/RT) within 5% of its true value and in accordance with
ASHRAE Guide 22 and AHRI 550/590;
(ii) Location and installation of the measuring devices to meet the manufacturers
recommendation;
(iii) Data acquisition system with a minimum resolution of 16 bit;
(iv) All data logging with capability to trend at 1 minute sampling time interval;
(v) Flow meters are to be provided for chilled-water and condenser water loop
and shall be of ultrasonic / full bore magnetic type or equivalent;
(vi) Temperature sensors are to be provided for chilled water and condenser
water loop and shall have an end-to-end measurement uncertainty not
exceeding 0.05 C over the entire measurement or calibration range. All
thermo-wells shall be installed in a manner which ensures that the sensors
can be in direct contact with fluid flow. Provisions shall be made for each
temperature measurement location to have two spare thermo-wells located at
both side of the temperature sensor for verification of measurement accuracy;
and
(vii) Dedicated power meters are to be provided for each of the following groups of
equipment : chillers, chilled water pumps, condenser water pumps and cooling
towers
8

Table 4.1.6(a) : Residential Building Criteria


Green Mark Points

Part 1 Energy Efficiency


RB 1-1 Thermal Performance of Building
Envelope Residential Envelope Transmittance
Value (RETV)
Enhance the overall thermal performance of building
envelope to minimise heat gain thus reducing the
overall cooling load when required.
Baseline : Maximum Permissible RETV = 25 W/m2

3 points for every reduction of 1 W/m2 in


RETV from the baseline
Points scored = 75 [3 x (RETV)]
where RETV 25 W/m2
(Up to 15 points)

RB 1-2 Naturally Ventilated Design and AirConditioning System


(a) Dwelling Unit Indoor Comfort
Enhance dwelling unit indoor comfort through the
provision of good natural ventilation design and
energy efficient air-conditioners
Option 1 Ventilation Simulation Modeling
Use of ventilation simulation modeling and analysis
or wind tunnel testing to identify the most effective
building design and layout to achieve good natural
ventilation for all unit types.

0.2 point for every percentage of typical units with


good natural ventilation
Points scored = 0.2 x (% of typical units with
good natural ventilation)
(up to 20 points)
OR

OR
Option 2 Ventilation Design (without the use of
simulation modeling) and Efficient Use of AirConditioning System
(i) Air flow within dwelling units

Building layout design: Proper design of


building layout that utilizes prevailing wind
conditions to achieve adequate cross
ventilation.

Dwelling unit design: Good ventilation in


indoor units through sufficient openings.

0.5 point for every 10 % of units with window


openings facing north and south directions
Points scored = 0.5 x (% of units /10)
0.5 point for every 10% of living rooms and
bedrooms designed with true cross ventilation
Points scored = 0.5 x (% rooms/10)
(Up to 8 points)

(ii) Provision of air-conditioning system


Use of energy efficient air-conditioners that are
certified under the Singapore Energy Labelling
Scheme.
Note (1) : Option 2(ii) is not applicable for developments
where air-conditioners are not provided. Points will be
scored and prorated accordingly under Option 2(i)

Extent of Coverage : At least 80% of the


air-conditioners used in all dwelling units
Air-conditioners labelled with :
Three Ticks 4 points
Four Ticks 8 points

Green Mark Points

Part 1 - Energy Efficiency


(b) Natural Ventilation in Common Areas
Design for natural ventilation in following common
areas :

Extent of Coverage : At least 80% of the


applicable areas

(i) Lift lobbies and corridors

1 point

(ii) Staircases

1 point

RB 1-3 Daylighting
Encourage design that optimises the use of effective
daylighting to reduce energy use for artificial lighting.
(a) Use of daylight and glare simulation analysis to
verify the adequacy of ambient lighting levels in
all dwelling units living and dining areas. The
ambient lighting levels
should meet the
illuminance level and Unified Glare Rating
(UGR) stated in SS CP 38 Code of Practice for
Artificial lighting in Buildings and SS 531 : Part
1:2006 Code of Practice for Lighting of Work
Places.

Extent of coverage: At least 80% of the units with


daylighting provisions meet the minimum
illuminance level and are within the acceptable
glare exposure.
Points scored based on the extent of
perimeter daylight zones
Distance from the
Faade Perimeters (m)
3.0
4.0 5.0
> 5.0

Points
Allocation
1
2
3

(Up to 3 points)
Extent of Coverage : At least 80% of the
applicable areas
1 point
1 point
1 point

(b) Daylighting in the following common areas :


(i) Lift lobbies and corridors
(ii) Staircases
(iii) Car parks
RB 1-4 Artificial Lighting
Encourage the use of energy efficient lighting in
common areas to minimise energy consumption
from lighting usage while maintaining proper lighting
level.
Baseline = Maximum lighting power budget stated in
SS 530

0.25 point for every percentage improvement


in the lighting power budget
Points scored = 0.25 x (% improvement)
(Up to 10 points)

RB 1-5 Ventilation in Carparks


Encourage the use of energy efficient design and
control of ventilation systems in car parks.
(a) Carparks are designed with natural ventilation.
(b) CO sensors are used to regulate the demand for
mechanical ventilation (MV).
Note (2): Where there is a combination of different
ventilation mode adopted for carpark design, the points
obtained under RB1-5 will be prorated accordingly.

Naturally ventilated carparks 6 points


Points scored based on the mode of mechanical
ventilation provided
Fume extract 4 points
MV with or without supply - 3 points
(Up to 6 points)

RB 1-6 Lifts
Encourage the use of lifts with AC variable voltage
and variable frequency (VVVF) motor drive or
equivalent and energy efficient features such as
sleep mode features or equivalent.
10

1 point

Green Mark Points

Part 1 Energy Efficiency


RB 1-7 Energy Efficient Features
Encourage the use of energy efficient features that
are innovative and have positive environmental
impact.
(a) Use of energy efficient equipment or products
that are certified by approved local certification
body.

Extent of Coverage : 90% of the applicable


equipment type or product
0.5 point for each eligible certified equipment
or product
(Up to 2 points)

(b) Use of the energy efficient features


Examples :

2 points for high impact item


Heat recovery devices
Regenerative lifts
Cool paints
Gas water heaters
Calculation of Energy Efficiency Index (EEI)
Provision of vertical greenery system that
helps to reduce heat gain to buildings

1 point for medium impact item


0.5 point for low impact item
(Up to 5 points)

RB 1-8 Renewable Energy


Encourage the application of renewable energy
sources such as solar energy in buildings.

3 points for every 1% replacement of electricity


(exclude households usage) by renewable
energy
(Up to 20 points)

PART 1 ENERGY EFFICIENCY


CATEGORY SCORE :

11

Sum of Green Mark Points obtained


from RB 1-1 to 1-8

Green Mark Points

Part 2 Water Efficiency


RB 2-1 Water Efficient Fittings
Encourage the use of water efficient fittings that are
certified under the Water Efficiency Labeling
Scheme (WELS).
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)

Basin taps and mixers


Flushing cistern
Shower taps, mixers or showerheads
Sink/Bib taps and mixers
All other water fittings

Rating based on Water


Efficiency Labeling
Scheme (WELS)
Very Good

Excellent

Points scored based


on the number and
water efficiency rating
of the fitting type used

Weightage
8

(Up to 10 points)
10

RB 2-2 Water Usage Monitoring


Provision of private meters to monitor the major
water usage such as irrigation, swimming pools and
other water features.

1 point

RB 2-3 Irrigation System and Landscaping


Provision of suitable systems that utilise rainwater or
recycled water for landscape irrigation and use of
plants that require minimal irrigation to reduce
potable water consumption.
(a) Use of non potable water including rainwater for
landscape irrigation.

1 point

(b) Use of automatic water efficient irrigation system


with rain sensor.

Extent of Coverage : At least 50% of the


landscape areas are served by the system
1 point
Extent of Coverage : At least 80% of the
landscape areas

(c) Use of drought tolerant plants that require


minimal irrigation.

1 point

PART 2 WATER EFFICIENCY


CATEGORY SCORE :

12

Sum of Green Mark Points obtained


from RB 2-1 to 2-3

Green Mark Points

Part 3 Environmental Protection


RB 3-1 Sustainable Construction
Encourage recycling and the adoption of building
designs, construction practices and materials that
are environmentally friendly and sustainable.
(a) Use of Sustainable and Recycled Materials
(i) Green Cements with approved industrial by
product (such as Ground Granulated
Blastfurnace Slag (GGBS), silica fume, fly
ash) to replace Ordinary Portland Cement
(OPC) by at least 10% by mass for
superstructural works.
(ii) Recycled Concrete Aggregates (RCA) and
Washed Copper Slag (WCS) from approved
sources to replace coarse and fine aggregates
for concrete production of main building
elements.
Note (3) : For structural building elements, the use of
RCA and WCS shall be limited to maximum 10%
replacement by mass of coarse/fine aggregates
respectively or as approved by the relevant authorities.

1 point

1 point for every incremental of 0.5 times (0.5x)


of the usage requirement (Up to 2x)
Points
Allocation

Quantity of RCA /WCS


(tons)
0.5 x usage requirement

1.0 x usage requirement

1.5 x usage requirement

2.0 x usage requirement

where usage requirement = 0.03 x (GFA in m2)

(Up to 5 points for RB 3-1(a)(i) and (a)(ii))

(b) Concrete Usage Index (CUI)


Encourage designs with efficient use of concrete
for building components.

Project CUI (m3/m2)

Points Allocation

0.70

0.60

0.50

0.40

0.35

RB 3-2 Sustainable Products


Promote use of environmentally friendly products
that are certified by approved local certification
body and are applicable to non-structural and
architectural related building components.

Weightage based on the extent of


environmental friendliness of
products
Good

Very Good

Excellent

Points scored
based on the
weightage and the
extent of coverage
& impact
1 point for high
impact item
0.5 point for low
impact item

0.5

13

1.5

(Up to 8 points)

Green Mark Points

Part 3 Environmental Protection


RB 3-3 Greenery Provision
Encourage greater use of greenery, restoration of
trees to reduce heat island effect.
(a) Green Plot Ratio (GnPR) is calculated by
considering the 3D volume covered by plants
using the prescribed Leaf Area Index (LAI).

GnPR

Points Allocation

1.0 to < 2.0

2.0 to < 3.0

3.0 to < 4.0

4.0 to < 5.0

5.0 to < 6.0

6.0

(b) Restoration, conservation or relocation of


existing trees on site.

1 point

(c) Use of compost recycled from horticulture waste.

1 point

RB 3-4 Environmental Management Practice


Encourage the adoption of environmental friendly
practices during construction and building operation.
(a) Implement effective environmental management
programmes including monitoring and setting of
targets to minimise energy use, water use and
construction waste.

1 point

(b) Main builder that has good track records in the


adoption of sustainable, environmentally friendly
and considerate practices during construction
such as the Green and Gracious Builder Award.

1 point

(c) Building quality assessed under the Construction


Quality Assessment System (CONQUAS) and
Quality Mark Scheme.

1 point each
(Up to 2 points)

(d) Developer, main builder, M & E consultant and


architect that are ISO 14000 certified.

0.25 point for each firm


(Up to 1 point)

(e) Project team comprises Certified Green Mark


Manager (GMM), Certified Green Mark Facilities
Manager (GMFM) and Certified Green Mark
Professional (GMP).

0.5 point for certified GMM


0.5 point for certified GMFM
1 point for certified GMP
(Up to 1 point)

(f) Provision of building users guide with details of


the environmental friendly facilities and features
within the building and their functionalities in
achieving
the
intended
environmental
performance during building operation.

1 point

(g) Provision of facilities or recycling bins at each


block of development for collection and storage
of different recyclable waste such as paper,
glass, plastic etc.

1 point

14

Green Mark Points

Part 3 Environmental Protection


RB 3-5 Green Transport
Promote environmental friendly transport options
and facilities to reduce pollution from individual car
use.
(a) Good access to nearest MRT/LRT or bus stops.

1 point

(b) Provision of covered walkway to facilitate


connectivity and use of public transport.

1 point

(c) Provision of electric vehicle charging stations


within the development.

Extent of Coverage : Minimum 1 number of


electric vehicle charging station for every 100
carpark lots. (Cap at 5)
1 point

(d) Provision of covered/sheltered bicycle parking


lots.

Points scored based on the number of bicycle


parking lots provided
1 point if the provision 10% x number of
dwelling units
0.5 point if the provision 5% x number of
dwelling units

RB 3-6 Stormwater Management


Encourage the treatment of stormwater run-off before
discharge to public drains.
Provision of infiltration features or design features as
recommended in PUBs ABC Waters Design
Guidelines :

Points scored based on the extent of the


stormwater treatment.
3 points for treatment of run-off from more than
35% of total site area or paved area

Bioretention swales/ other bioretention


systems
Rain gardens
Constructed wetlands
Cleansing biotopes
Retention ponds

2 points for treatment of run-off from


10% to 35% of total site area
1 point for treatment of run-off from
up to 10% of total site area
(Up to 3 points)

PART 3 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION


CATEGORY SCORE :

15

Sum of Green Mark Points obtained


from RB 3-1 to 3-6

Green Mark Points

Part 4 Indoor Environmental Quality


RB 4-1 Noise Level
Building design to achieve ambient internal noise
level as specified :

1 point

55 dB ( 6am-10pm) LeqA
45 dB (10pm-6 am) LeqA

RB 4-2 Indoor Air Pollutants


Minimise airborne contaminants, mainly from inside
sources to promote a healthy indoor environment.
(a) Use of low volatile organic compounds (VOC)
paints certified by approved local certification
body.
(b) Use of environmentally friendly adhesives that
are certified by approved local certification body.

Extent of Coverage : At least 90% of the total


internal wall areas
1 point
Extent of Coverage : At least 90% of the
applicable areas
1 point

RB 4-3 Waste Disposal


Minimise airborne contaminants from waste by
locating refuse chutes or waste disposal area at open
ventilation areas such as service balconies or
common corridors.

1 point

RB 4-4 Indoor Air Quality in Wet Areas


Provision of adequate natural ventilation and
daylighting in wet areas such as kitchens, bathrooms
and toilets.

Points scored based on the % of applicable areas


with such provision.
1 point for 50% to 90% of applicable areas
2 points for more than 90% of applicable areas

PART 4 INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY


CATEGORY SCORE :

16

Sum of Green Mark Points obtained


from RB 4-1 to 4-4

Green Mark Points

Part 5 Other Green Features


RB 5-1 Green Features and Innovations
Encourage the use of other green features that are
innovative and have positive environmental impact.
Examples :

Pneumatic waste collection system


Carbon footprint of development
Calculation of Concrete Usage Index (CUI)
Dual chute system
Self cleaning faade system
Conservation of existing building structure
Water efficient washing machines with Good
rating and above.

PART 5 OTHER GREEN FEATURES


CATEGORY SCORE :

2 points for high impact item


1 point for medium impact item
0.5 point for low impact item
(Up to 7 points)

Sum of Green Mark Points obtained


from RB 5-1

Green Mark Score (Residential)


Green Mark Score (Res) = Category Score [(Part 1 Energy Efficiency) +
(Part 2 Water Efficiency) +
(Part 3 Environmental Protection) +
(Part 4 Indoor Environmental Quality) +
(Part 5 Other Green Features)]
where Category Score for Part 1 30 points and
Category Score for Part 2, 3, 4 & 5 20 points

17

Table 4.1.6(b)(i) : Non-Residential Building Criteria


Green Mark Points

Part 1 Energy Efficiency

(A) Applicable to Air-Conditioned Building Areas (with an aggregate air-conditioned areas > 500 m2)

NRB 1-1 Thermal Performance of Building


Envelope Envelope Thermal Transfer Value
(ETTV)
Enhance the overall thermal performance of building
envelope to minimise heat gain thus reducing the
overall cooling load requirement.
2

Baseline : Maximum Permissible ETTV = 50 W/m

1.2 points for every reduction of 1 W/m2


in ETTV from the baseline
Points scored = 1.2 x (50 - ETTV)
where ETTV 50 W/m2
(Up to 12 points)

NRB 1-2 Air-Conditioning System


Encourage the use of better energy efficient airconditioned equipment to minimise energy
consumption.

(a) Water-Cooled Chilled-Water Plant


Peak building cooling load 500 RT

(a) Water-Cooled Chilled-Water Plant :

15 points for meeting the prescribed chilledwater plant efficiency of 0.70 kW/RT

Water-Cooled Chiller
Chilled-Water Pump
Condenser Water Pump
Cooling Tower

Baseline
PrerequisiteRequirements
Minimum Design System
Efficiency (DSE) for central
chilled-water plant

0.25 point for every percentage improvement


in the chilled-water plant efficiency over the
baseline

Peak Building Cooling Load


500 RT

< 500 RT

0.70 kW/RT

0.80 kW/RT

Points scored = 0.25 x (% improvement)


Peak building cooling load < 500 RT
12 points for meeting the prescribed chilledwater plant efficiency of 0.80 kW/RT
0.45 point for every percentage improvement
in the chilled-water plant efficiency over the
baseline
Points scored = 0.45 x (% improvement)
(Up to 20 points)
(b) Air Cooled Chilled-Water Plant/
Unitary Air-Conditioners

(b) Air Cooled Chilled-Water Plant / Unitary AirConditioners


Air Cooled Chilled-Water Plant :

Peak building cooling load 500 RT

Air-Cooled Chiller
Chilled-Water Pump

12 points for meeting the prescribed airconditioning system efficiency of 0.80 kW/RT

Unitary Air-Conditioners :
Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) system
Single-Spilt Unit
Multi-Spilt Unit

18

1.3 points for every percentage improvement


in the air-conditioning system efficiency over
the baseline
Points scored = 1.3 x (% improvement)

Green Mark Points

Part 1 Energy Efficiency

(A) Applicable to Air-Conditioned Building Areas (with an aggregate air-conditioned areas > 500 m2)

(b) Air Cooled Chilled-Water Plant / Unitary AirConditioners Contd

Baseline

Peak building cooling load < 500 RT

Peak Building Cooling Load


500 RT

< 500 RT

0.80 kW/RT

0.90 kW/RT

10 points for meeting the prescribed airconditioning system efficiency of 0.90 kW/RT

PrerequisiteRequirements
Minimum Design System
Efficiency (DSE) for air
cooled chilled-water plant or
unitary conditioners

Note (1) : Where there is a combination of central chilled


water plant with unitary conditioners, the points scored will
only be based on the air-conditioning system with a larger
aggregate capacity.

(c) Air Distribution System :


Air Handling Units (AHUs)
Fan Coil Units (FCUs)
Option 1 Fan System Motor Nameplate Power

Air Distribution System Type


AHUs/FCUs 4kW
(Constant Volume)

AHUs 4kW
(Variable Volume)

Allowable Motor
Nameplate Power
(kW/m3/s)

(W/CMH)

1.7

0.47

2.4

0.67

Fan systems with nameplate


motor power < 4 kW

No baseline

Option 2 Fan System Input Power


Baseline : ASHRAE 90.1:2010 Clause 6.5.3.1 and as
prescribed below :

Baseline

Allowable Fan System


Input Power*

Air Distribution System Type


AHUs/FCUs 4kW
(Constant Volume)

AHUs 4kW
(Variable Volume)

Fan systems with nameplate


motor power < 4 kW

Points scored = 0.6 x (% improvement)


(Up to 20 points)

(c) Air Distribution System


0.2 point for every percentage improvement in
the air distribution system efficiency over the
baseline

Baseline : SS553:2009 Table 2 Fan power limitation and


as prescribed below :

Baseline

0.6 point for every percentage improvement in


the air-conditioning system efficiency over the
baseline

(kW/m3/s)

(W/CMH)

1.5

0.42

2.1

0.58

0.6

0.17

* Applicable pressure drop adjustments can be considered based on


ASHRAE 90.1 Table 6.5.3.1.1B and are subject to BCAs evaluation

Note (2) : For buildings with cooling provision from a


licensed District Cooling System (DCS) supplier where the
plant efficiency data is not available, the point scored for
NRB 1-2(a) and (b) will be pro-rated based on the air
distribution system efficiency under NRB 1-2(c).

19

Points scored = 0.2 x (% improvement)


(Up to 6 points)

Green Mark Points

Part 1 Energy Efficiency

(A) Applicable to Air-Conditioned Building Areas (with an aggregate air-conditioned areas > 500 m2)

(d) Prerequisite Requirements : Provision of


permanent measuring instruments for monitoring
of water-cooled chilled-water plant efficiency. The
installed instrumentation shall have the capability
to calculate a resultant plant efficiency
(i.e. kW/RT) within 5 % of its true value and in
accordance with ASHRAE Guide 22 and AHRI
Standard 550/590.

Applicable only to buildings with provision of


water cooled chilled-water plant
1 point

The following instrumentation and installation are also


required to be complied with :
(i)

Location and installation of the measuring devices


to meet the manufacturers recommendation.

(ii) Data acquisition system with a minimum resolution


of 16 bit.
(iii) All data logging with capability to trend at 1 minute
sampling time interval.
(iv) Flow meters are to be provided for chilled-water
and condenser water loop and shall be of
ultrasonic / full bore magnetic type or equivalent.
(v) Temperature sensors are to be provided for
chilled water and condenser water loop and shall
have an end-to-end measurement uncertainty not
exceeding 0.05 C over the entire measurement
or calibration range. All thermo-wells shall be
installed in a manner that ensures that the
sensors can be in direct contact with fluid flow.
Provisions shall be made for each temperature
measurement location to have two spare thermowells located at both side of the temperature
sensor for verification of measurement accuracy.
(vi) Dedicated power meters are to be provided for
each of the following groups of equipment :
chillers, chilled water pumps, condenser water
pumps and cooling towers.

(e) Verification of central water cooled chilled-water


plant instrumentation : Heat balance
substantiating test for water cooled chilled-water
plant to be computed in accordance with AHRI
550/590

1 point

(f) Provision of variable speed controls for chiller


plant equipment such as chilled-water pumps and
cooling tower fans to ensure better part-load plant
efficiency.

1 point

(g) Sensors or similar automatic control devices are


used to regulate outdoor air flow rate to maintain
the concentration of carbon dioxide in accordance
with Table 1 Recommended IAQ Parameters of
SS 554.
Carbon dioxide acceptable range: 700 ppm
above outdoor.

1 point

Exception: For buildings that are underground, NRB 1-1


may be excluded in the computation. The score under
NRB 1-2 will be pro-rated accordingly.

Sub-Total (A) :

20

Sum of Green Mark Points obtained


from NRB 1-1 to 1-2

Green Mark Points

Part 1 Energy Efficiency

(B) Applicable to Non Air-Conditioned Building Areas (with an aggregate non air-conditioned areas > 10 % of
total floor area excluding carparks and common areas)

NRB 1-3 Building Envelope Design / Thermal


Parameters
Enhance the overall thermal performance of building
envelope to minimise heat gain that would improve
indoor thermal comfort and encourage natural
ventilation or mechanical ventilation.
(a) Minimum direct west facing faade through
building design orientation.
Note (3) : Orientation of faade that falls within the range
of 22.5 N of W and 22.5 S of W will be defined as west
facing facade. Core walls for lifts or staircases and toilets
that are located within this range are exempted in
computation.

Points scored = 15 0.3 x (% of west facing


facade areas over total
faade areas)
(Up to 15 points)
Where there is no west facing faade, the
total points scored for this item will be 30
points; the NRB 1-3 b(i), b(ii) and (c) as listed
below will not be applicable.

(b)(i) Minimum west facing window openings.

Points scored = 10 - 0.1 x (% of west facing


window areas over total
west facing faade
areas)

(b)(ii) Effective sunshading provision for windows on


the west faade with minimum shading of 30%.

Points scored = 0.1 x (% of west facing


window areas with
sunshading devices over
total west facing faade
areas)
(Up to 10 points for NRB 1-3 b(i) & b(ii))

(c) Better thermal transmittance (U-value) of external


west facing walls.

Points scored = 0.05 x (% of the external


west facing walls areas
with U value of 2 W/m2K
or less over total west
facing facades areas)
(up to 5 points)

The U-value of external west facing walls should


be equal or less than 2 W/m2K.

(d) Better thermal transmittance (U-value) of roof.


Baseline: U-value for roof stated below
depending on the weight range of roof structure:

1 point for every 0.1 W/m2K reduction from


the baseline roof U-value
( Up to 5 points)

Weight
Group

Weight range
2
(kg/m )

Light
Medium
Heavy

Under 50
50 to 230
Over 230

Maximum
Thermal
Transmittance
2
(W/m K)
0.8
1.1
1.5

Exception : For existing buildings, NRB 1-3(a) may be


excluded in computation, the total score obtained under
NRB 1-3 (b), (c) and (d) will be prorated accordingly.

21

Green Mark Points

Part 1 Energy Efficiency

(B) Applicable to Non Air-Conditioned Building Areas (with an aggregate non air-conditioned areas > 10 % of
total floor area excluding carparks and common areas)

NRB 1-4 Natural Ventilation / Mechanical


Ventilation
(a) Natural Ventilation
Encourage building design that facilitates good
natural ventilation.
(i) Proper design of building layout that utilises
prevailing wind conditions to achieve
adequate cross ventilation.
(ii) Use of ventilation simulation modeling and
analysis or wind tunnel testing to identify the
most effective building design and layout to
ensure good natural ventilation.
(b) Mechanical Ventilation

1 point for every 10% of units/rooms with window


openings facing north and south directions
Points scored = 1 x (% of units/10)
(Up to 10 points)
5 points
Additional 5 points
if the recommendations are implemented and
meet the air-flow requirement
(Up to 10 points)

Encourage energy efficient mechanical ventilation


system design as the preferred ventilation mode to
minimise air-conditioned spaces.
Option 1 Fan System Motor Nameplate Power
Baseline : SS553:2009 Table 8 Fan power limitation and
as prescribed below :

Baseline
Air Distribution System Type

Allowable Motor
Nameplate Power
(kW/m3/s)

(W/CMH)

1.7

0.47

AHUs/FCUs 4kW
(Constant Volume)

Fan systems with nameplate


motor power < 4 kW

0.6 point for every percentage improvement in


the mechanical ventilation system efficiency
over the baseline
Points scored = 0.6 x (% improvement)
(Up to 15 points)

No baseline

Option 2 Fan System Input Power


Baseline : ASHRAE 90.1 : 2010 Clause 6.5.3.1 and as
prescribed below :

Baseline

Allowable Fan System


Input Power*

Air Distribution System Type


AHUs/FCUs 4kW
(Constant Volume)

Fan systems with nameplate


motor power < 4 kW

(kW/m3/s)

(W/CMH)

1.5

0.42

0.6

0.17

* Applicable pressure drop adjustments can be considered based on


ASHRAE 90.1 Table 6.5.3.1.1B and are subject to BCAs evaluation

Note (4) : Where there is a combination of naturally


ventilated and mechanical ventilated spaces, points scored
will be based on the predominant ventilation modes of
normally occupied spaces.

Sub-Total (B) :

22

Sum of Green Mark Points obtained


from NRB 1-3 to 1-4

Green Mark Points

Part 1 - Energy Efficiency


(C) General

NRB 1-5 Daylighting


Encourage design that optimises the use of effective
daylighting to reduce energy use for artificial lighting.
(a) Use of daylighting and glare simulation analysis to
verify the adequacy of ambient lighting levels in
meeting the illuminance level and Unified Glare
Rating (UGR) stated in SS 531:Part 1:2006
Code of Practice for Lighting of Work Places.

Extent of coverage: At least 75% of the units with


daylighting provisions meet the minimum
illuminance level and are within the acceptable
glare exposure.
Points scored based on the extent of
perimeter daylight zones
Distance from the
Faade Perimeters (m)
3.0
4.0 5.0
> 5.0

Points
Allocation
1
2
3

(Up to 3 points)
(b) Daylighting for the following common areas:

Extent of Coverage : At least 80 % of each


applicable area

(i) Toilets
(ii) Staircases
(iii) Corridors
(iv) Lift Lobbies
(v) Atriums
(vi) Carparks

0.5 point each


(Up to 3 points)

Note (5) : All daylit areas must be integrated with automatic


electric lighting control system.

NRB 1-6 Artificial Lighting


Encourage the use of energy efficient lighting to
minimise energy consumption from lighting usage
while maintaining proper lighting level.
Baseline : Maximum lighting power budget stated in
SS 530

0.3 point for every percentage improvement in


lighting power budget
Points scored = 0.3 x (% improvement)
(Including tenant lighting provision)
(Up to 12 points)
(Excluding tenant lighting provision)
(Up to 5 points)

NRB 1-7 Ventilation in Carparks


Encourage the use of energy efficient design and
control of ventilation systems in carparks.

Naturally ventilated carparks 4 points

(a) Carparks are designed with natural ventilation.


(b) CO sensors are used to regulate the demand for
mechanical ventilation (MV).
Note (6) : Where there is a combination of different
ventilation mode adopted for carpark design, the points
obtained under NRB 1-7 will be prorated accordingly.

23

Points scored based on the mode of


mechanical ventilation provided
Fume extract 2.5 points
MV with or without supply - 2 points
(Up to 4 points)

Green Mark Points

Part 1 - Energy Efficiency


(C) General

NRB 1-8 Ventilation in Common Areas


Encourage the use of energy efficient design and
control of ventilation systems in the following
common areas :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)

Extent of Coverage : At least 90 % of each


applicable area
Points scored based on the mode of ventilation
provided in applicable areas

Toilets
Staircases
Corridors
Lift lobbies
Atrium

Natural ventilation 1.5 points for each area


Mechanical ventilation 0.5 point for each area
(Up to 5 points)

NRB 1-9 Lifts and Escalators


Encourage the use of energy efficient lifts and
escalators.

Extent of Coverage : All lifts and escalators

Lifts and/or escalators with AC variable voltage and


variable frequency (VVVF) motor drive and sleep
mode features.

Lifts 1 point
Escalators 1 point

NRB 1-10 Energy Efficient Practices & Features


Encourage the use of energy efficient practices and
features that are innovative and/or have positive
environmental impact.
(a) Computation of energy consumption based on
design load in the form of energy efficiency index
(EEI).

1 point

(b) Use of vertical greenery system on east and west


faade to reduce heat gain through building
envelope

1 point for high impact


0.5 point for low impact

(c) Use of energy efficient equipment or product that


are certified by approved local certification body

Extent of Coverage : 90% of the applicable


equipment type or product
0.5 point for each eligible certified equipment
or products
(Up to 2 points)

(d) Use of energy efficient features.

3 points for every 1% energy saving


over total building energy consumption

Examples:

Heat recovery system


Sun pipes
Regenerative lifts
Light shelves
Photocell sensors to maximise the use of
daylighting

24

(Up to 8 points)

Part 1 Energy Efficiency

Green Mark Points

(C) General

NRB 1-11 Renewable Energy


Point scored based on the expected energy
efficiency index (EEI) and % replacement of
electricity by renewable energy source

Encourage the application of renewable energy


sources in buildings.

Every 1% replacement of electricity


(based on total building electricity
consumption) by renewable energy
source

Expected
Energy
Efficiency
Index (EEI)

Include
tenants
usage

Exclude
tenants
usage

30 kWh/m2/yr

5 points

3 points

< 30 kWh/m2/yr

3 points

1.5 points

(Up to 20 Points)
Sub-Total (C) :

Sum of Green Mark Points obtained


from NRB 1-5 to 1-11

PART 1 ENERGY EFFICIENCY


CATEGORY SCORE :

Sub-Total (A) X Air-Conditioned Building Floor Area


Total Floor Area
+
Sub-Total ( B) X Non Air-Conditioned Building Floor
Area
Total Floor Area
+
Sub-Total (C)
where Sub-Total (A) = Sum of Green Mark Points obtained
under Section (A) NRB 1-1 to 1-2
Sub-Total (B) = Sum of Green Mark Points obtained
under Section (B) NRB 1-3 to 1-4
Sub-Total (C) = Sum of Green Mark Points obtained
under Section (C) NRB 1-5 to 1-11

25

Green Mark Points

Part 2 Water Efficiency


NRB 2-1 Water Efficient Fittings
Encourage the use of water efficient fittings covered
under the Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme
(WELS).
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)

Rating based on Water


Efficiency Labelling
Scheme (WELS)
Very Good

Basin taps and mixers


Flushing cistern
Shower taps, mixers or showerheads
Sink/Bib taps and mixers
Urinals and urinal flush valve

Points scored based on


the number and water
efficiency rating of the
fitting type used

Excellent

Weightage
8

(Up to 10 points)

10

NRB 2-2 Water Usage and Leak Detection


Promote the use of sub-metering and leak detection
system for better control and monitoring.
(a) Provision of private meters to monitor the major
water usage such as irrigation, cooling tower
and tenants usage.
(b) Linking all private meters to the Building
Management System (BMS) for leak detection.

1 point

1 point

NRB 2-3 Irrigation System and Landscaping


Provision of suitable systems that utilise rainwater
or recycled water and use of plants that require
minimal irrigation to reduce potable water
consumption.
(a) Use of non potable water including rainwater for
landscape irrigation.

1 point

(b) Use of automatic water efficient irrigation system


with rain sensor.

Extent of Coverage : At least 50% of the


landscape areas are served by the system
1 point

(c) Use of drought tolerant plants that require


minimal irrigation.

Extent of Coverage : At least 80% of the


landscape areas
1 point

NRB 2-4 Water Consumption of Cooling Tower


Reduce potable water use for cooling purpose.
(a) Use of cooling tower water treatment system
that can achieve 7 or better cycles of
concentration at acceptable water quality.

1 point

(b) Use of NEWater or on-site recycled water from


approved sources.

PART 2 WATER EFFICIENCY


CATEGORY SCORE :

26

1 point

Sum of Green Mark Points obtained


from NRB 2-1 to 2-4

Green Mark Points

Part 3 Environmental Protection


NRB 3-1 Sustainable Construction
Encourage recycling and the adoption of building
designs, construction practices and materials that are
environmentally friendly and sustainable
(a) Use of Sustainable and Recycled Materials
(i) Green Cements with approved industrial byproduct (such as Ground Granulated
Blastfurnace Slag (GGBS), silica fume, fly ash)
to replace Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC) by
at least 10% by mass for superstructural
works.

1 point

(ii) Recycled Concrete Aggregates (RCA) and


Washed Copper Slag (WCS) from approved
sources to replace coarse and fine aggregates
for concrete production of main building
elements.

1 point for every incremental of 0.5 times (0.5x) of


the usage requirement (Up to 2x)

Note (7) : For structural building elements, the use of


RCA and WCS shall be limited to maximum 10%
replacement by mass of coarse/fine aggregates
respectively or as approved by the relevant authorities.

Points
Allocation

Quantity of RCA /WCS


(tons)
0.5 x usage requirement

1.0 x usage requirement

1.5 x usage requirement

2.0 x usage requirement

where usage requirement = 0.03 x (GFA in m2)

(Up to 5 points for NRB 3-1(a)(i) and (a)(ii))

(b) Concrete Usage Index (CUI)


Encourage designs with efficient use of concrete for
building components.

NRB 3-2 Sustainable Products


Promote use of environmentally friendly products
that are certified by approved local certification
body and are applicable to non-structural and
architectural related building components.

Project CUI (m3/m2)

Points Allocation

0.70

0.60

0.50

0.40

0.35

Weightage based on the extent


of environmental friendliness
of products
Good

Excellent

1 point for high


impact item
0.5 point for low
impact item
0.5

27

Very
Good

Points scored based


on the weightage and
the extent of
coverage & impact

1.5

(Up to 8 points)

Green Mark Points

Part 3 Environmental Protection


NRB 3-3 Greenery Provision
Encourage greater use of greenery, restoration of
trees to reduce heat island effect.
(a) Green Plot Ratio (GnPR) is calculated by
considering the 3D volume covered by plants
using the prescribed Leaf Area Index (LAI).

GnPR
0.5 to < 1.0
1.0 to < 1.5
1.5 to < 3.0
3.0 to < 3.5
3.5 to < 4.0
4.0

Points Allocation
1
2
3
4
5
6

(b) Restoration, conservation or relocation of


existing trees on site.

1 point

(c) Use of compost recycled from horticulture waste.

1 point

NRB 3-4 Environmental Management Practice


Encourage the adoption of environmental friendly
practices during construction and building operation.
(a) Implement effective environmental friendly
programmes including monitoring and setting
targets to minimise energy use, water use and
construction waste.

1 point

(b) Main builder that has good track records in the


adoption of sustainable, environmentally friendly
and considerate practices during construction
such as the Green and Gracious Builder Award.

1 point

(c) Building quality assessed under the Construction


Quality Assessment System (CONQUAS).

1 point

(d) Developer, main builder, M & E consultant and


architect that are ISO 14000 certified.

0.25 point for each firm


(Up to 1 point)

(e) Project team comprises Certified Green Mark


Manager (GMM), Green Mark Facilities Manager
(GMFM) and Green Mark Professional (GMP).

0.5 point for certified GMM


0.5 point for certified GMFM
1 point for certified GMP
(Up to 1 point)

(f) Provision of building users guide that should


include details of the environmental friendly
facilities and features within the building and their
functionalities in achieving the intended
environmental performance during building
operation.

1 point

(g) Provision of facilities or recycling bins for


collection and storage of different recyclable
waste such as paper, glass, plastic etc.

1 point

28

Green Mark Points

Part 3 Environmental Protection


NRB 3-5 Green Transport
Promote environmental friendly transport options
and facilities to reduce pollution from individual car
use.
(a) Good access to nearest MRT/LRT or bus stops.

1 point

(b) Provision of covered walkway to facilitate


connectivity and the use of public transport.

1 point

(c) Provision of electric vehicle charging stations and


priority parking lots within the development.

Extent of Coverage : Minimum one(1) electric


vehicle charging station and priority parking lot for
every 100 carpark lots (Cap at 5)
1 point

(d) Provision of sheltered bicycle parking lots with


adequate shower and changing facilities.

Extent of Coverage : Minimum ten (10) bicycle


parking lots (Cap at 50)
Points scored based on the number of bicycle
parking lots provided (with adequate shower and
changing facilities)
1 point if the number provided
3% x Gross Floor Area (GFA)/10
0.5 point if the number provided
1.5% x Gross Floor Area (GFA)/10

NRB 3-6 Refrigerants


Reduce the potential damage to the ozone layer and
the increase in global warming caused by the release
of ozone depleting substances and greenhouse
gases.
(a)

Refrigerants with ozone depletion potential


(ODP) of zero or with global warming potential
(GWP) of less than 100.

(b)

Use of refrigerant leak detection system in


critical areas of plant rooms containing chillers
and other equipments with refrigerants.

1 point

1 point

NRB 3-7 Stormwater Management


Encourage treatment of stormwater run-off before
discharge to the public drains.
Points scored based on the extent of
stormwater treatment.

Provision of infiltration or design features as


recommended in PUBs ABC Waters Design
Guidelines :

3 points for treatment of run-off from more than


35% of total site area or paved area

Bioretention swales/ other bioretention


systems
Rain gardens
Constructed wetlands
Cleansing biotopes
Retention ponds

2 points for treatment of run-off from


10% to 35% of total site area
1 point for treatment of run-off from
up to 10% of total site area

PART 3 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION


CATEGORY SCORE :
29

Sum of Green Mark Points obtained from


NRB 3-1 to 3-7

Part 4 Indoor Environmental Quality

Green Mark Points

NRB 4-1 Thermal Comfort


Air-conditioning system is designed to allow for
cooling load variation due to fluctuations in ambient
air temperature and to maintain consistent indoor
conditions for thermal comfort.

1 point

Indoor operative temperature between 24 C to 26 C


Relative humidity < 65%
NRB 4-2 Noise Level
Occupied spaces in buildings are designed with good
ambient sound levels as recommended in SS 553
Table 4 Recommended ambient sound level.

1 point

NRB 4-3 Indoor Air Pollutants


Minimise airborne contaminants, mainly from inside
sources to promote a healthy indoor environment.
(a) Use of low volatile organic compounds (VOC)
paints certified by approved local certification
body.
(b) Use of environmental friendly adhesives certified
by approved local certification body.

Extent of Coverage : At least 90% of the total


internal wall areas
1 point
Extent of Coverage : At least 90% of the applicable
areas
1 point

NRB 4-4 Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management


Ensure that building ventilation systems are
designed and installed to provide acceptable IAQ
under normal operating conditions.
(a) Provision of filtration media and differential
pressure monitoring equipment in Air Handling
Units (AHUs) in accordance with SS 554:
Clause 4.3.4.5 and its Annex E.

1 point

(b) Implement effective IAQ management plan to


ensure that building ventilation systems are
clean and free from residuals left over from
construction activities. Internal surface condition
tests for ACMV systems are to be included.

1 point

NRB 4-5 High Frequency Ballasts


Applicable to offices, classrooms and the like
Improve workplace lighting quality by avoiding low
frequency flicker associated with fluorescent lighting
with the use of high frequency ballasts in the
fluorescent luminaries.

PART 4 INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY


CATEGORY SCORE :

30

Extent of Coverage : At least 90% of all applicable


areas that are served by fluorescent luminaries
2 points

Sum of Green Mark Points obtained


from NRB 4-1 to 4-5

Green Mark Points

Part 5 Other Green Features


NRB 5-1 Green Features and Innovations
Encourage the use of other green features that are
innovative and/or have positive environmental
impact.

2 points for high impact item

Examples :

1 point for medium impact item

Pneumatic waste collection system


Carbon footprint of development
Calculation of Concrete Usage Index (CUI)
Dual chute system
Self cleaning faade system
Conservation of existing building structure

0.5 point for low impact item


(Up to 7 points)

Sum of Green Mark Points obtained


from NRB 5-1

PART 5 OTHER GREEN FEATURES


CATEGORY SCORE :

Green Mark Score (Non-Residential)


Green Mark Score (Non-Res) = Category Score [(Part 1 Energy Efficiency) +
(Part 2 Water Efficiency) +
(Part 3 Environmental Protection) +
(Part 4 Indoor Environmental Quality) +
(Part 5 Other Green Features)]
where Category Score for Part 1 30 points and
Category Score for Part 2, 3, 4 & 5 20 points

4.1.9 For Transit Stations, the following prerequisite requirements that are to be
complied with :
Minimum design system efficiency (DSE) of building cooling systems during
building operation :
(i) For Transit Stations using Water Cooled Chilled-Water Plant:
Peak Building Cooling Load (RT)
Minimum Design
System Efficiency
(DSE) for Central
Chilled-Water Plant

< 300

300 & < 500

500

Design System Efficiency (kW/RT)


0.85

0.80

0.7

(ii) For Transit Stations using Unitary Air-Conditioners:


Peak Building Cooling Load (RT)

Minimum Design
System Efficiency
(DSE) for Air Cooled
Chilled-Water Plant or
Unitary AirConditioners

< 500

500

Design System Efficiency (kW/RT)


0.90

31

0.80

Table 4.1.6(b)(ii) : Non-Residential Building Criteria Transit Stations


Green Mark Points

Part 1 - Energy Efficiency


ST 1-1 Environmental Control Systems

(a) Water-Cooled Chilled-Water Plant

Encourage the use of better energy efficient airconditioned and mechanical ventilation systems
to minimise energy consumption.

Peak building cooling load 500 RT

15 points for meeting the prescribed chilled-water


plant efficiency of 0.70 kW/RT.

(a) Water-Cooled Chilled-Water Plant :

Chiller
Chilled-water pump
Condenser water pump
Cooling tower
Baseline

Prerequisite
Requirements
Minimum Design
System Efficiency
(DSE) for central
chilled-water plant

0.25 point for every percentage improvement in


the chilled-water plant efficiency over the baseline.
Point scored = 15 + 0.25 x (% improvement)
Peak building cooling load 300 RT and < 500RT

Peak Building Cooling Load


500 RT

300 RT &
< 500 RT

< 300 RT

0.70
kW/RT

0.80
kW/RT

0.85
kW/RT

12 points for meeting the prescribed chilled-water


plant efficiency of 0.80 kW/RT.
0.45 point for every percentage improvement in
the chilled-water plant efficiency over the baseline.
Point scored = 12 + 0.45 x (% improvement)
Peak building cooling load < 300 RT

Note (1): The chilled water plant efficiency at part-load


condition should be considered in the design to ensure that it
meets the required efficiency to ensure that the chillers are
designed to operate within the best efficiency range.

7 points for meeting the prescribed chilled-water


plant efficiency of 0.85 kW/RT.
0.6 point for every percentage improvement in the
chilled-water plant efficiency over the baseline.
Point scored = 7 + 0.6 x (% improvement)
(Up to 20 points)
(b) Air Distribution System
0.15 point for every percentage improvement in
the air distribution system efficiency over the
baseline.

(b) Air Distribution System :


Air Handling Units (AHUs)
Fan Coiled Units (FCUs)
Option 1 Fan System Motor Nameplate Power
Baseline : SS553:2009 Table 2 Fan power
limitation and as prescribed below :

Baseline
Air Distribution
System Type

(Up to 3 points)

Allowable Motor
Nameplate Power
(kW/m3/s)

(W/CMH)

AHUs/FCUs 4kW
(Constant Volume)

1.7

0.47

AHUs 4kW
(Variable Volume)

2.4

0.67

Fan systems with


nameplate motor
power < 4 kW

Points scored = 0.15 x (% improvement)

No baseline

32

Green Mark Points

Part 1 - Energy Efficiency


Option 2 Fan System Input Power
Baseline : ASHRAE 90.1:2010 Clause 6.5.3.1 and
as prescribed below :

Baseline
Air Distribution
System Type

Allowable Fan System Input


Power*
3

(kW/m /s)

(W/CMH)

AHUs/FCUs 4kW
(Constant Volume)

1.5

0.42

AHUs 4kW
(Variable Volume)

2.1

0.58

Fan systems with


nameplate motor
power < 4 kW

0.6

0.17

b) Air Distribution System (Scoring same as Option 1)


0.15 point for every percentage improvement in
the air distribution system efficiency over the
baseline.
Points scored = 0.15 x (% improvement)
(Up to 3 points)

* Applicable pressure drop adjustments can be considered based on


ASHRAE 90.1 Table 6.5.3.1.1B and are subject to BCAs evaluation

Note (2): For transit stations with cooling provision from a


licensed District Cooling System (DCS) supplier, the
computation of the plant efficiency will be pro-rated based on
the air-distribution system efficiency under ST1-1(b).

(c) Unitary Air-Conditioners

(c) Unitary Air-Conditioners :

Variable Refrigerants Flow (VRF) system


Single-Spilt Unit
Multi-Spilt Unit
Baseline

Peak Building Cooling Load


500 RT

Prerequisite
Requirements
Minimum Design
System Efficiency for
unitary conditioners

< 500 RT

Peak building cooling load 500 RT

12 points for meeting the prescribed airconditioning system efficiency of 0.80 kW/RT.
1.3 points for every percentage improvement in
the air-conditioning system efficiency over the
baseline.
Point scored = 12 + 1.3 x (% improvement)

0.80 kW/RT

0.90 kW/RT

Peak building cooling load < 500 RT

10 points for meeting the prescribed air conditioning system efficiency of 0.90 kW/RT.

Baseline : Minimum Design System Efficiency of


0.9 kW/RT for unitary air-conditioners
Note (3) : Where there is a combination of central chilled-water
plant with unitary air-conditioners, the scoring will be based on
the air-conditioning system with a larger aggregate capacity.

0.6 point for every percentage improvement in


the air-conditioning system efficiency over the
baseline.
Points scored = 10 + 0.6 x (% improvement)
(Up to 20 points)

(d) Mechanical Ventilation System for non airconditioning spaces :

(d) Mechanical Ventilation System


0.2 point for every percentage improvement in the
mechanical ventilation system efficiency over the
baseline.

Option 1 Fan System Motor Nameplate Power


Baseline : SS553:2009 Table 8 Fan power
limitation and as prescribed below :

Baseline
Air Distribution System
Type
AHUs/FCUs 4kW
(Constant Volume)
Fan systems with
nameplate motor
power < 4 kW

Points scored = 0.2 x (% improvement)

Allowable Motor
Nameplate Power
(kW/m3/s)

(W/CMH)

1.7

0.47

(Up to 4 points)

No baseline

33

Green Mark Points

Part 1 - Energy Efficiency


(d) Mechanical Ventilation System for non airconditioning spaces :

(d) Mechanical Ventilation System (Scoring same as


Option 1)

Option 2 Fan System Input Power


Baseline : ASHRAE 90.1 : 2010 Clause 6.5.3.1
and as prescribed below :

Baseline
Air Distribution
System Type

0.2 point for every percentage improvement in the


mechanical ventilation system efficiency over the
baseline.

Allowable Fan System Input


Power*
(kW/m3/s)

(W/CMH)

AHUs/FCUs 4kW
(Constant Volume)

1.5

0.42

Fan systems with


nameplate motor
power < 4 kW

0.6

0.17

Points scored = 0.2 x (% improvement)


(Up to 4 points)

* Applicable pressure drop adjustments can be considered based on


ASHRAE 90.1 Table 6.5.3.1.1B and are subject to BCAs evaluation

ST 1-2 Lighting Systems


Encourage the use of better energy efficient lighting
and daylighting to minimise energy consumption
from lighting usage while maintaining proper
lighting level.

Points scored based on percentage of lighting


power budget over the baseline.
6 points 80%
4.5 points 85%
4 points 90%

(a) Artificial lighting


Baseline : Maximum lighting power budget
stated in SS 530 or as approved.

(Up to 6 points)
(b) Daylighting in public areas (i.e. concourse and
platform areas) of underground station

0.5 point for every % of public areas of


underground station utilising natural lighting.
(Up to 6 points)

ST 1-3 Electrical Services


Encourage the provision of better energy efficient
service transformers, sub-metering and related
controls for energy monitoring.
(a) Provision of low-loss service transformers

Transformer capacity > 1 MVA


No load loss at
rated voltage

Full load loss at


rated voltage

Points
Allocation

< 0.25% of rated load

< 2.5% of rated load

< 0.2% of rated load

< 1.5% of rated load

Transformer capacity 1 MVA

(b) Provision of sub-metering in the following


systems

No load loss at
rated voltage

Full load loss at


rated voltage

Points
Allocation

< 0.35% of rated load

< 2.5% of rated load

< 0.25% of rated load

< 1.5% of rated load

Points scored based on the provision of


sub-metering for the systems listed

(i) Lighting system for public areas

3 points all systems listed

(ii) Air-conditioning system


(iii) Mechanical ventilation system for back of
house plant rooms
(iv) Plumbing and sanitary systems
(v) Lifts and escalators system
(vi) Electrical reticulation system for tenants

34

1.5 points at least 50% of the


systems listed

Green Mark Points

Part 1 - Energy Efficiency


ST 1-4 Lifts and Escalators
Encourage the use of energy efficient lifts and
escalators.
(a) Lifts with the following energy efficient features
(i)

Geared or other better energy efficient


traction
(ii) AC variable voltage and variable frequency
(VVVF) motor drive or equivalent
(iii) Sleep mode features or equivalent

(b) Escalators with the following energy efficient


features
(i)

Direct drive with gear box directly coupled


to the main drive shaft
(ii) AC variable voltage and variable frequency
(VVVF) motor drive
(iii) Standby speed mode
(iv) Standby stop mode

0.5 point for each item and points scored to be


prorated based on the extent of coverage
(Up to 1.5 points)

0.5 point for each item and points scored to be


prorated based on the extent of coverage
(Up to 2 points)

ST 1-5 Energy Efficient Features


Encourage the use of energy efficient practices and
features which have positive impacts on energy
savings and environment.
(a) Use of the following energy efficient features.
Examples :
Autocondenser tube cleaning system
Variable speed chilled water pumps
Automatic control devices to regulate the
demand for mechanical ventilation for
staircases and corridors
Automatic control devices to regulate
outdoor air supply to maintain the carbon
dioxide (CO2) concentration to below 700
ppm
Instrumentation for monitoring central
water cooled chilled-water plant efficiency
in accordance with prescribed standard
Heat Balance substantiating test for
water cooled chilled-water plant
(b) Use of energy efficient equipment or products
that are certified by approved local certification
body.

(c) Other energy efficient features that are not


listed

1 point for each item

Extent of Coverage : 90% of the applicable


equipment type or product
0.5 point for each eligible certified equipment
or products
(Up to 2 points)
2 points for every 1% energy saving over the
total building energy consumption
(Up to 7.5 points for ST 1-5(a) to (c))

PART 1 ENERGY EFFICIENCY


CATEGORY SCORE :
35

Sum of Green Mark Points obtained


from ST 1-1 to 1-5

Green Mark Points

Part 2 Water Efficiency


ST 2-1 Water Efficient Fittings
Encourage the use of water efficient fittings that are
certified under the Water Efficiency Labelling
Scheme (WELS).

Points scored based on the number of fitting types


with very good or excellent WELS rating
6 points for all fitting types

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)

Basin taps and mixers


Flushing cistern
Shower taps, mixers or showerheads
Sink/Bib taps and mixers
Urinals and urinal flush valve

4 points at least 3 fitting types


2 points - at least 2 fitting types
(Up to 6 points)

ST 2-2 Water Usage Monitoring


Promote the use of sub meters for better control
and monitoring of water usage.
0.5 point

(a) Provision of sub-meters to monitor water


usage from tenants (retail shops)

0.5 point
(b) Provision of sub-meters to monitor water
usage of public toilets.

0.5 point

(c) Provision of sub-meters to monitor water


usage of cooling towers.
ST 2-3 Water Consumption of Cooling Towers
Reduce potable water use for cooling purpose.
(a) Use of cooling tower water treatment system
which can achieve 7 or better cycles of
concentration at acceptable water quality

1 point

(b) Provision of effective drift eliminator with


minimum efficiency of 0.002%

2 points

(c) Provision of alternative water sources like


NEwater or recycled AHU condensate etc

0.5 point

PART 2 WATER EFFICIENCY


CATEGORY SCORE :

36

Sum of Green Mark Points obtained


from ST 2-1 to 2-3

Green Mark Points

Part 3 Environmental Protection


ST 3-1 Sustainable Construction
Encourage recycling and the adoption of building
designs, construction practices and materials that
are environmentally friendly and sustainable.
(a) Use of Sustainable and Recycled Materials
(i) Green Cements with approved industrial
by-product (such as Ground Granulated
Blastfurnance Slag (GGBS), silica fume &
fly ash) to replace Ordinary Portland
Cement (OPC) by at least 10% by mass for
the concrete production of structural works.

1 point

(ii) Recycled Concrete Aggregates (RCA) and


Washed Copper Slag (WCS) from
approved sources to replace coarse and
fine aggregates for concrete production of
non-load bearing partition walls.

Points scored based on the number of


applicable rooms

RCA

WCS

80% of rooms

50% of rooms

(iii) Recycled Concrete Aggregates (RCA),


incinerated bottom ash or reclaimed
asphalt pavement for road construction
(iv) Use of eco-concrete for the following
features
Road kerbs
At-grade foot paths
Road side drains

Points Allocation

Extent of Coverage

1 point

Extent of coverage : 90% of applicable areas


0.5 point for each item
(Up to 1 point)

(b) Use of sustainable alternatives which can be


fabricated off-site with minimal concrete
usage and wet trade for the construction of
entrance structure.

1 point

(c) Reuse of suitable excavated soil in other sites.

1 point

ST 3-2 Sustainable Products


Use of sustainable products for non-structural
building components and construction such as
environmentally friendly products that are certified
by approved local certification body or equivalent.

Weightage based on the


extent of environmental
friendliness of products
Good

0.5

Very Good

Excellent

1.5

2.0

Points scored
based on the
weightage and
extent of coverage
& impact
1 point for high
impact item
0.5 point for low
impact item
(Up to 4 points)

37

Green Mark Points

Part 3 Environmental Protection


ST 3-3 Greenery Provision
Encourage greater use of greenery, restoration of
trees to reduce heat island effect.
(a) Green Plot Ratio (GnPR) is calculated by
considering the 3D volume covered by plants
using the prescribed Leaf Area Index (LAI)
Note (4) : Site area is defined by a zone 5 m beyond atgrade structures excluding areas within road reserve and
neighbouring developments.

GnPR

Points Allocation

0.5 to < 1.0

0.5

1.0 to < 1.5

1.5 to < 2.0

1.5

2.0

1 point

(b) Use of compost recycled from horticulture


waste.
ST 3-4 Site Selection
Encourage proper site planning and selection that
minimise land uptake.

Land Uptake

Points
Allocation

90 % under road reserve

70% under road reserve or


green field sites (with allowance
for development above)

50% under road reserve or


green field sites (with allowance
for development above)

70% above central median or


along road reserve

ST 3-5 Environmental Management Practice


Encourage the adoption of environmental friendly
practices during construction.
(a) Implementation of effective environmental
friendly programmes, which include setting
and monitoring of targets to minimise
energy use, water use and construction
waste.

1 point

(b) Main builder that has good track records in


the adoption of sustainable, considerate and
environmentally friendly practices during
construction such as the Green and
Gracious Builder Award.

1 point

(c) Developer, main builder, M & E consultant


and architect that are ISO 14000 certified.

0.25 point for each firm


(Up to 1 point)

(d) Project team comprises certified Green Mark


Manager (GMM), Green Mark Facilities
Manager
(GMFM)
or
Green
Mark
Professional (GMP).

0.5 point for certified GMM & GMFM


1 point for certified GMP
(Up to 1 point)

38

Green Mark Points

Part 3 Environmental Protection


ST 3-6 Public Transport Accessibility
Promote environmental friendly transport options
with provisions that improve accessibility to other
public transport nodes and neighbouring
developments.

2 points 3 or more covered links

(a) Covered links to bus stops

1 point 2 covered links


0.5 point 1 covered link
1 point 2 or more covered links

(b) Covered links to taxi-stand / passenger


drop-off point

0.5 point 1 covered link

(c) Covered links to bus interchanges / other


transit stations

3 points

Points scored based on the provision of connections


(in numbers)

(d) Connectivity to neighbouring developments


with the following provision such as

1.5 points for having multiple connections to


each development

Connections to be made available


via underground or covered links
Knock out panels for future connection
Additional entrance

1 point for one connection to each development


1 point for having each knock-out panels
1 point for having each additional entrance
(Up to 6 points)

(e) Provision of bicycle parking lots

Points scored based on the number of bicycle


parking lots

(f) Provision of sheltered bicycle parking

Number of bicycle
parking lots
20 39 lots

Points Allocation

40 69 lots

70 99 lots

1.5

100 lots

0.5

Points scored based on the percentage of bicycle


parking lots with shelters over the total number of
bicycle lots provided
0.5 point for 50% of total provision
1.0 point for 100% of total provision

39

Green Mark Points

Part 3 Environmental Protection


ST 3-7 Refrigerants
Reduce ozone depletion and global warming by
minimising the release of ozone depleting
substances and greenhouses gases into the
atmosphere.
(a) Refrigerants with ozone depletion potential
(ODP) of zero or with global warming
potential (GWP) of less than 100.

1 point

(b) Use of refrigerant leak detection system at


critical areas of plant rooms containing
chillers and other equipments with
refrigerants.

1 point

PART 3 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION


CATEGORY SCORE :

40

Sum of Green Mark Points obtained


from ST 3-1 to 3-7

Green Mark Points

Part 4 Indoor Environmental Quality


ST 4-1 Thermal Comfort
Air-conditioning system is designed to allow for
cooling load variation due to fluctuations in
ambient air temperature to ensure consistent
indoor conditions.

1 point

Indoor operative temperature between 240 C to


260 C
Relative Humidity < 65%
ST 4-2 Indoor Air Pollutants
Minimise indoor airborne contaminants for the well
being and comfort of users.
(a) Use of low volatile organic compounds (VOC)
paints certified by approved local certification.

Extent of coverage ; At least 90% of the total


applicable internal wall areas
1 point

(b) Use of environmental friendly adhesives and


finishes certified by approved local
certification body.

Extent of coverage : At least 90% of the total


applicable areas
1 point

ST 4-3 Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management


Ensure that ventilation systems are designed and
installed to provide acceptable IAQ under normal
operating conditions.
(a) Provision of filtration media and differential
pressure monitoring equipment in air-handling
units (AHUs) in accordance with SS 554 :
Clause 4.3.4.5 and its Annex E.

1 point

(b) Implementation of effective IAQ management


plan to ensure that ventilation systems are
clean and free from residuals left over from
construction activities.
Internal surface
condition tests for environmental control
systems is to be included.

1 point

PART 4 INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY


CATEGORY SCORE :

41

Sum of Green Mark Points obtained


from ST 4-1 to 4-3

Green Mark Points

Part 5 Other Green Features


ST 5-1 Green Features and Innovations
Encourage the use of other green features which
are innovative and have positive environmental
impact.

2 point for high impact item


1 point for medium impact item
0.5 point for low impact item
(Up to 6 points)

PART 5 OTHER GREEN FEATURES


CATEGORY SCORE :

Sum of Green Mark Points obtained


from ST 5-1

Green Mark Score (Non-Residential Transit Stations)


Green Mark Score = Category Score [(Part 1 Energy Efficiency) +
(Part 2 Water Efficiency) +
(Part 3 Environmental Protection) +
(Part 4 Indoor Environmental Quality) +
(Part 5 Other Green Features)]
where Category Score for Part 1 30 Green Mark points and
Category Score for Part 2, 3, 4 & 5 20 Green Mark points

5
5.1

SUBMISSION PROCEDURES
General
The submission of the Green Mark score will be one of the requirements for Building
Plan (BP) approval. The BP will not be approved if the submitted Green Mark score is
lower than the stipulated minimum of 50 points. The Green Mark score is to be
submitted by QP(BP) at the following stages:

5.2

BP stage
Before Temporary Occupation Permit (TOP) or Certificate of Statutory
Completion (CSC) stage (if there is no TOP application).

Submission at BP Stage
The QP shall indicate in Form BPD_BP03 (Application for Approval of Building Plans)
whether the submission of Green Mark score is applicable for the proposed building
works. If applicable, the Green Mark score is to be submitted together with the BP
submission using the prescribed forms and calculation sheets generated from the
Green Mark (GM) e-Filing system. The Green Mark score for the proposed building
works and the numerical scores assigned to those building works are to be declared
by the QP and the other appropriate practitioners.

5.3

Submission before TOP or CSC Stage (if there is no TOP application)


5.3.1

Upon completion of the building works, the as-built Green Mark score and the
numerical scores assigned to those completed building works are to be
declared by the QP and the other appropriate practitioners. QP shall submit the
as-built Green Mark score using the prescribed forms and calculation sheets
42

generated from the Green Mark e-Filing system. This submission is to be made
before a temporary occupation permit or in a case where no such permit is
earlier applied for, a certificate of statutory completion can be granted.

5.4

Documentary Evidences
5.4.1 The QP and the other appropriate practitioners shall ensure that the following
documents and records are available as evidences to demonstrate compliance
with the environmental sustainability standard and criteria :

Extracts of the tender specifications and other form of documentary


proof showing the pertinent details of the proposed green practices or
features adopted;

Relevant plan layouts, elevations and sectional drawings showing the


applicable areas, locations or types of green features adopted;

Summary sheets listing the detailed breakdown and the extent of


implementation; and

Calculations, worksheets or other data in the prescribed format as


shown in Annex B.

5.4.2 Details of the documentary evidences required can be found in Annex B for
compliance.

5.4.3 Submittal of the documentary evidences may be required and shall be made in
such manner and be in such form as the Commissioner of Building Control
requires upon request.

43

Annex A
AREAS OF RESPONSIBILITY

Table A-1 : Areas of Responsibility under Residential Building Criteria


Residential Building Criteria

Responsibility

Part 1 - Energy Efficiency


RB 1-1 Thermal Performance of Building Envelope - RETV

QP (BP)1

RB 1-2 Naturally Ventilated Design and Air-Conditioning System


Dwelling Unit Comfort
- Ventilation Simulation /Design
- Air-Conditioning System
Natural Ventilation in Common Areas
RB 1-3 Daylighting

QP(BP)

RB 1-4 Artificial Lighting

PE (Electrical)

RB 1-5 Ventilation in Carparks

PE (Mechanical)

RB 1-6 Lifts

PE (Electrical)

RB 1-7

RB 1-8

PE (Mechanical)
PE (Electrical)
Appropriate Practitioners3

Energy Efficient Features


Heat Recovery Devices
Occupancy Sensors /Photo Sensors
Others
Renewable Energy

QP (BP)
PE (Mechanical)2
QP (BP)

PE (Electrical)

Part 2 Water Efficiency


RB 2-1 Water Efficient Fittings

QP(BP)

RB 2-2 Water Usage Monitoring

PE (Mechanical)

RB 2-3 Irrigation System and Landscaping

QP(BP)

Part 3 Environmental Protection


RB 3-1 Sustainable Construction

Appropriate Practitioners

RB 3-2 Sustainable Products

Appropriate Practitioners

RB 3-3 Greenery Provision

QP(BP)

RB 3-4 Environmental Management Practice

QP(BP)

RB 3-5 Green Transport

QP(BP)

RB 3-6 Stormwater Management

QP(BP)

Part 4 Indoor Environmental Quality


RB 4-1 Noise Level

QP(BP)

RB 4-2 Indoor Air Pollutants

QP(BP)

RB 4-3 Waste Disposal

QP(BP)

RB 4-4 Indoor Air Quality in Wet Areas

QP(BP)

Part 5 Other Green Features


RB 5-1 Green Features and Innovations

1
2

Appropriate Practitioners

QP(BP) refers to Qualified Person who submits building plan.


PE(Mechanical) or PE(Electrical) refers to a professional engineer registered under the Professional Engineers Act
(Cap 253) in the branch of mechanical engineering or electrical engineering.
Appropriate Practitioners refer to QP(BP), PE(Mechanical) or PE(Electrical).

46

Table A-2 : Areas of Responsibility under Non-Residential Building Criteria


Non-Residential Building Criteria

Responsibility

Part 1 - Energy Efficiency


NRB 1-1 Thermal Performance of Building Envelope - ETTV

QP (BP)

NRB 1-2 Air-Conditioning System

PE (Mechanical)

NRB 1-3 Building Envelope Design/ Thermal Parameters

QP (BP)

NRB 1-4 Natural Ventilation/


Mechanical Ventilation
NRB 1-5 Daylighting

QP (BP)
PE (Mechanical)
QP (BP)

NRB 1-6 Artificial Lighting

PE (Electrical)

NRB 1-7 Ventilation in Carparks

PE(Mechanical)

NRB 1-8 Ventilation in Common Areas

PE (Mechanical)

NRB 1-9 Lifts and Escalators

PE (Electrical)

NRB 1-10 Energy Efficient Practices / Features


Heat Recovery System
Auto Condenser Tube Cleaning System
Energy Efficiency Index Computation
Occupancy Sensors /Photo Sensors
Others
NRB 1-11 Renewable Energy

PE (Mechanical)
PE (Mechanical)
PE (Electrical)
PE (Electrical)
Appropriate Practitioners
PE (Electrical)

Part 2 Water Efficiency


NRB 2-1 Water Efficient Fittings

QP (BP)

NRB 2-2 Water Usage and Leak Detection

PE (Mechanical)

NRB 2-3 Irrigation System and Landscaping

QP (BP)

NRB 2-4 Water Consumption of Cooling Towers

PE (Mechanical)

Part 3 Environmental Protection


NRB 3-1 Sustainable Construction

Appropriate Practitioners

NRB 3-2 Sustainable Products

Appropriate Practitioners

NRB 3-3 Greenery Provision

QP (BP)

NRB 3-4 Environmental Management Practice

QP (BP)

NRB 3-5 Green Transport

QP (BP)

NRB 3-6 Refrigerants

PE (Mechanical)

NRB 3-7 Stormwater Management

QP (BP)

Part 4 Indoor Environmental Quality


NRB 4-1 Thermal Comfort

PE (Mechanical)

NRB 4-2 Noise Level

QP (BP)

NRB 4-3 Indoor Air Pollutants

QP (BP)

NRB 4-4 Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management

PE (Mechanical)

NRB 4-5 High Frequency Ballasts

PE (Electrical)

Part 5 Other Green Features


NRB 5-1 Green Features and Innovations

Appropriate Practitioners
47

Table A-3 : Areas of Responsibility under Non-Residential Transit Stations


Non-Residential Building Criteria Transit Stations

Responsibility

Part 1 - Energy Efficiency


ST 1-1

Environmental Control Systems

PE (Mechanical)

ST 1-2

Lighting Systems

PE (Electrical)

ST 1-3

Electrical Services

PE (Electrical)

ST 1-4

Lifts and Escalators

PE (Electrical)

ST 1-5

Energy Efficient Features

Appropriate Practitioners

Part 2 Water Efficiency


ST 2-1

Water Efficient Fittings

PE (Mechanical)

ST 2-2

Water Usage Monitoring

PE (Mechanical)

ST 2-3

Water Consumption of Cooling Towers

PE (Mechanical)

Part 3 Environmental Protection


ST 3-1 Sustainable Construction

Appropriate Practitioners

ST 3-2 Sustainable Products

Appropriate Practitioners

ST 3-3 Greenery Provision

QP (BP)

ST 3-4 Site Selection

QP (BP)

ST 3-5 Environmental Management Practice

QP (BP)

ST 3-6 Public Transport Accessibility

QP (BP)

ST 3-7 Refrigerants

PE (Mechanical)

Part 4 Indoor Environmental Quality


ST 4-1 Thermal Comfort

PE (Mechanical)

ST 4-2 Indoor Air Pollutants

QP (BP)

ST 4-3 Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management

PE (Mechanical)

Part 5 Other Green Features


ST 5-1 Green Features and Innovations

Appropriate Practitioners

Note : Documentary evidences prepared by the domain experts or specialists such as acoustic consultant,
landscape architect etc may be used to demonstrate compliance with the criteria where applicable.

48

Annex B
SCORING METHODOLOGY & DOCUMENTATION

Annex B-1
SCORING METHODOLOGY & DOCUMENTATION

Residential Building Criteria

(I) Energy Related Requirements


Part 1 Energy Efficiency

RB1-1
RB1-2
RB1-3
RB1-4
RB1-5
RB1-6
RB1-7
RB1-8

Thermal Performance of Building Envelope-RETV


Naturally Ventilated Design and Air-Conditioning
System
Daylighting
Artificial Lighting
Ventilation in Carparks
Lifts
Energy Efficient Features
Renewable Energy

RB 1-1 THERMAL PERFORMANCE OF BUILDING ENVELOPE - RETV

Objectives

Enhance overall thermal performance of building envelope to minimise heat gain


thus reducing the overall cooling load requirement.

Applicability

Applicable to residential buildings with GFA of 2000 m2.

Baseline
Standard

Maximum permissible RETV = 25 W/m2


RETV stands for Residential Envelope Transmittance Value.
The computation of RETV shall be based on the methodology specified in the Code
on Envelope Thermal Performance for Buildings issued by BCA.

Requirements

Up to 15 points can be scored for building envelope with better thermal


performance than the baseline standard :
3 points for every reduction of 1 W/m2 in RETV from the baseline.
Points scored = 75 [3 x (RETV)] where RETV 25 W/m2
For developments consisting of more than one residential building, the weighted
average of the RETVs based on the faade areas of these buildings shall be used
as the basis for point allocation.
That is
RETV Weighted
average

= (RETVbldg xAbldg) / Adevt

where RETVbldg = RETV for a residential building (W/m2)

Documentary
Evidences

References

Abldg

= Summation of all facade areas that enclose all living rooms, dining
rooms, study rooms and bedrooms of a residential building (m2)

Adevt

= Summation of total applicable facade areas of all residential buildings


within the development (m2) (i.e. Abldg)

Architectural elevation drawings showing the composition of the different faade


or wall systems that are relevant for the computation of RETV;

Architectural plan layouts and elevations showing the living rooms, dining
rooms, study rooms and bedrooms;

Extracts of the tender specification or material schedules showing the salient


data of the material properties that are to be used for the faade or external wall
system; and

RETV calculation.

Code on Envelope Thermal Performance for Buildings issued by BCA.


52

Worked
Example
1-1

Example 1
RETV = 22 W/m2
Points scored = 75 [3 x (RETV)] = 75 [3x (22)] = 9 points
Example 2
RETV = 19 W/m2
Points scored = 75 [3 x (RETV)] = 75 [3 x (19)] = 18 points > 15 points (max)
Therefore, points scored should be 15 points (Max)
Example 3
A proposed building development comprises three residential building blocks. The
individual RETV of the each residential building computed are as follows :
RETVbldg1 = 20 W/m2

Abldg = 4000 m2

RETVbldg2 = 25 W/m2

Abldg = 3600 m2

RETVbldg3 = 19 W/m2

Abldg = 5000 m2

Adevt

= 4000 +3600 +5000


= 12600 m2

Therefore
RETV Weighted
average

= (RETVbldg xAbldg) / Adevt


=

(RETVbldg1 xAbldg1) + (RETVbldg2 xAbldg2) + (RETVbldg3 xAbldg3)


(Adevt)

(20 x 4000) + (25 x 3600) + (19 x 5000)


12600

21.03 W/m2

Points scored = 75 [3 x (RETV)] = 75 [3 x (21.03)] = 11.91 points


Note : Refer to the Code on Envelope Thermal Performance for Buildings for more detailed
examples on how to compute the RETV.

53

RB 1-2 NATURALLY VENTILATED DESIGN AND AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM

Objectives

Enhance building design to achieve good natural ventilation for better indoor
comfort or through the use of better efficient air-conditioners if needed.

Applicability

Applicable to all dwelling units within the development.

Baseline
Standard

1-2(a) Option 1 - Ventilation simulation modeling and analysis shall be based on


the methodology specified in Annex C Ventilation Simulation Methodology and
Requirements.
1-2(a) Option 2(ii) - As specified under the Singapore Energy Labeling Scheme for
air-conditioners.

Requirements 1-2 (a) Dwelling Unit Indoor Comfort


For Option 1- Ventilation Simulation Modeling and Analysis
Up to 20 points can be scored for the use of ventilation simulation modeling &
analysis or wind tunnel testing to identify the most effective building design and
layout to achieve good natural ventilation for all unit types.
All typical dwelling unit types should be included in the ventilation simulation (up to
maximum of 5 types). If there are more than 5 typical dwelling unit types, the
selection of the units for simulation will be based on extent of coverage that is the
five typical dwelling units with the most number of units.
The unit is deemed to have good natural ventilation if the area-weighted average
wind velocity within the unit is not less than 0.60 m/s based on the ventilation
simulation analysis.
The percentage of units achieving good natural ventilation is given by:

(No. of Selected Units for Each Layout x Area-Weighted Average Wind Velocity) x 100%
Total Number of Selected Units x 0.60 m/s

0.2 point for every percentage of typical units with good natural ventilation
Points scored = 0.2 x (% of typical units with good natural ventilation)
For Option 2 Ventilation Design (without the use of ventilation simulation modeling)
and Efficient Use of Air-Conditioning System
Up to 16 points can be scored for the following design
Option 2(i) Air Flow within Dwelling Units
Building layout design that utilises prevailing wind conditions to achieve
adequate cross ventilation.
0.5 point for every 10% of units with window openings facing north and south
directions
Points scored = 0.5 x( % of units/10)

Dwelling unit design that allows for true cross ventilation in the living rooms and
bedrooms of the dwelling units
0.5 point for every 10% of living rooms and bedrooms design with true cross
ventilation
Points scored = 0.5 x (% of rooms/10)
54

Note: In Singapore, the prevailing wind comes from two predominant directions; that is the
north to north-east during the Northeast monsoon season and south to south-east during the
South-west monsoon season. Hence, buildings designed with window openings facing the
north and south directions have the advantage of the prevailing wind conditions that would
enhance indoor thermal comfort. Meteorological data on the more precise wind direction and
velocity of the site location can also be used as the basis for the design.
It is not necessary for the window openings to be located perpendicularly to the prevailing
wind direction. An oblique angle is considered acceptable as illustrated below.
Illustrations on building layout design that facilitate cross ventilation
Prevailing wind directions
from north to north-east

Prevailing wind directions


from south to south-east
Illustration 1 Building layout showing all dwelling units with window openings facing
the north and south direction. In this instance, all units can be considered meeting the
requirement 1-2(a) Option 2(i)

Prevailing wind directions from north to


north-east

A
A

C
B

Prevailing wind directions from south to


south-east

Illustration 2 Building layout showing all dwelling unit Type A and B with window
openings facing either the north or south direction. The dwelling unit Type C has no
window openings in the north and south directions. In this instance, no unit can be
considered meeting the requirement 1-2(a) Option 2(i)
55

Prevailing wind directions from


north to north-east
Illustration 3 Building layout
showing the window openings of
all dwelling units facing the north
and south direction except
dwelling unit 02. Dwelling 02 has
window openings facing only the
south direction and hence it is
not considered meeting the
requirement 1-2(a) Option 2(i)

02

Prevailing wind directions from


south to south-east

Illustration 4 Building layout


showing the window openings of
all dwelling units facing either the
north or south direction and
hence they are not considered
meeting the requirement
1-2(a) Option 2(i)

Prevailing wind directions from


north to north-east

Prevailing wind directions


from south to south-east

Illustrations on dwelling unit design that facilitates true cross ventilation

Dwelling unit design is considered to have true cross ventilation when there is a
reasonably unobstructed air flow path between the windows or vents on opposite
sides of the building. For this requirement, the main entrance of the dwelling units is
assumed to be closed and all the windows / internal doors are assumed to be open.

Bedroom Bedroom
2
1

Living room
Living room
Bedroom 1

Illustration 5 Dwelling unit layout


showing that both living room and
bedroom 1 are considered to have
true cross ventilation and meet the
requirement 1-2(a) Option 2(i)

56

Illustration 6 Dwelling unit layout showing


only bedroom 2 is considered to have true
cross ventilation. Living room and
bedroom 1 are not considered meeting the
requirement 1-2(a) Option 2(i)

Option 2(ii) Provision of energy efficient air-conditioning system


Up to 8 points can be scored for the use of the air-conditioners that are certified
under the Singapore Energy Labelling Scheme based on the following rating.
Energy Efficiency Rating

Point Allocation

4
8

Extent of coverage : At least 80% of air-conditioners used in all dwelling


units are energy labeled
Note: Option 2(ii) is not applicable for developments where air-conditioners are not
provided. Points can be scored and prorated accordingly under Option 2(i).
1-2 (b) Natural Ventilation in Common Areas
1-2(b)(i) 1 point can be scored if at least 80% of the lift lobbies (including private lift
lobbies) and corridors areas are designed to be naturally ventilated
1-2(b)(ii) 1 point can be scored if at least 80% of the staircases areas are designed
to be naturally ventilated

Documentary
Evidences

For 1-2(a) Option 1 Ventilation Simulation Modeling


Ventilation simulation or wind tunnel testing reports summarising the analysis
and modeling results for each typical space as well as the recommendations for
design. Refer to Annex C for details
Calculation showing the percentage of units achieving good natural ventilation in
the prescribed tabulated format as shown in worked example 1-2(a) Option 1.
For 1-2(a) Option 2(i) Air Flow within Dwelling Units
Floor plan of all the unit types with highlights of those with window openings
facing the north and south directions and/or with true cross ventilation;
Schedules showing the total number of units in the development and those with
window openings facing the north and south direction.
Schedules showing the total number of living rooms and bedrooms in the
development and those with true cross ventilation.
Calculation showing the percentage of living rooms and bedrooms of dwelling
units with true cross ventilation in the prescribed tabulated format as shown in
the worked example 1-2(a) Option 2.
For 1-2(a) Option 2(ii) Provision of Air-Conditioning Systems
Extracts of the tender specification showing the provision of the types of
air-conditioners for the dwelling units of the development;
Schedule of air-conditioners showing the numbers, types and the approved
rating from the Singapore Energy Labelling Scheme; and
Technical product information of the air-conditioners and approved rating.
For 1-2(b) Natural Ventilation in Common Areas
Plan layouts showing the applicable common areas and confirmation that they
are designed to be naturally ventilated.

References

57

Worked
Example
1-2(a)
Option 1

A residential development with one block of 20-storey apartments comprises


200 units and with 7 typical dwelling unit layouts or types.
1.

Select the five typical dwelling unit types with the most number of units for
ventilation simulation.
Based on the ventilation simulation results, list down the total number of
units for each typical dwelling unit type and its corresponding area-weighted
average wind velocity as tabulated below.

2.

Dwelling Unit Layouts /Types

No. of Units

Area Weighted Average


Wind Velocity

Typical Layout A

80

0.60

Typical Layout B

30

0.60

Typical Layout C

20

0.70

Typical Layout D

20

0.50

Typical Layout E

20

0.40

Total Number of Selected Units :

170

Typical Layout F*

15

Not included

Typical Layout G*

15

Not included

* Dwelling Unit Layout not selected for simulation

Percentage of units achieving good natural ventilation is given by:


(No. of Selected Units for Each Layout x Area-Weighted Average Wind Velocity)
Total Number of Selected Units x 0.60 m/s
80x0.60+30x0.60+20x0.70+20x 0.5 +20x0.40

=
=

170x0.60

x 100%

96%

Points scored for 1-2(a) Option 1 = 0.2 x 96% = 19.2 points

58

x 100%

Worked
Example
1-2(a)

Proposed residential development with one block of 10 storey apartment comprises


40 units. Each dwelling comes with a living room and two bedrooms. There are four
different unit types for this development as illustrated below.
Building Layout Design
Total no. of units in the developments = 40

Option 2
A

Total units with all window openings facing north and


south directions = 40

% of units with window openings facing north and south


directions = 40/40 x 100 = 100%
Points scored = 0.5 x (% unit/10)
= 0.5 x (100/10) = 5 points

Bedroom 2

Bedroom 1

Bedroom 1

Living room

Two-bedroom Type A

Bedroom 2

Living room

Two-bedroom Type B

The living room, bedroom 1 and bedroom 2 are


considered to have true cross ventilation.

The living room, bedroom 1 and bedroom 2 are


considered to have true cross ventilation.

Bedroom
2

Bedroom 2

Living room

Living
room

Bedroom 1

Bedroom 1

Two-bedroom Type C

Two-bedroom Type D

Only living room is considered to have true cross


ventilation. Both bedroom 1 & 2 do not meet the
requirement.

59

Only living room is considered to have true cross


ventilation. Both bedroom 1 & 2 do not meet the
requirement.

Dwelling Unit Design


Table 1-2(a)(ii) : Percentage of rooms with true cross ventilation
Type of dwelling unit

No. of units
(a)

For each unit


Bedrooms
Living room
with true
with true
cross
cross
ventilation
ventilation
(c)
(b)

Total living rooms


and bedrooms
with true cross
ventilation
(b + c) x (a)

2-bedroom Type A

10

30

2-bedroom Type B

10

30

2-bedroom Type C

10

10

2-bedroom Type D

10

10

Total :

80

Total no. of living rooms and bedrooms = 3 x 40 units = 120


Total no. of living rooms and bedrooms with true cross ventilation = 80
Percentage of living rooms and bedrooms
with true cross ventilation

= 80/120 x 100%
= 66.7%

Points scored = 0.5 x (% rooms/10) = 0.5 x (66.7/10) = 3.3 points


All dwelling units are provided with 4 ticks air-conditioners
Points scored for 1-2(a) Option 2(ii) = 8 points
Total points scored for 1-2(a) Option 2 = 5 +3.3 +8 = 16.3 points
Worked
Example
1-2(b)

Proposed development has the following provision :


All lift lobbies and corridors are designed to be naturally ventilated except for two
private lobbies of the penthouses units that are designed with air-conditioning
system. All staircases are designed to be naturally ventilated
No point for 1-2(b)(i) if less than 80% of lift lobbies are naturally ventilated.
1 point for 1-2(b)(ii) for staircases that are all designed to be naturally ventilated.
Therefore, points scored for 1-2(b) = 1 point

60

RB 1-3 DAYLIGHTING

Objectives

Encourage design that optimises the use of effective daylighting to reduce energy
use for artificial lighting

Applicability

1-3(a) Applicable to all dwelling units living and dining areas within the development.
1-3(b) Applicable to all common areas within the development.

Baseline
Standard

1-3(a) The daylighting and glare simulation shall be based on the methodology
specified in Annex D Daylighting and Glare Simulation Methodology and
Requirements.
Minimum illuminance level shall be in accordance with CP 38 Code of Practice for
Artificial Lighting in Buildings and design intent.
The acceptable Unified Glared Rating (UGR) shall be in accordance with SS 531:
Part 1 Code of Practice for Lighting of Work Places Indoor.

Requirements

1-3(a) Up to 3 points can be scored for the use of daylight and glare simulation
software to identify dwelling units living and dining areas with acceptable glare
exposure and effective daylighting.
The daylighting provision is deemed to be effective if the areas within the prescribed
distances from building perimeters (that is the perimeter daylight zones) meet the
minimum illuminance level and acceptable Unified Glared Rating.
Points can be scored if at least 80% of the units are designed with effective
daylighting provision. The scoring will be based on the extent of the perimeter
daylight zones that is expressed as in term of the distances from faade perimeters
as shown in the table below.
Distance from Faade Perimeters (m)

Points Allocation

3.0

4.0 - 5.0

> 5.0

1-3(b)(i) 1 point for provision of daylighting for lift lobbies and corridors.
1-3(b)(ii) 1 point for provision of daylighting for staircases.
1-3(b)(iii) 1 point for provision of daylighting for carparks.

Documentary
Evidences

For 1-3(a)
Schedules showing the total number of living and dining areas in the
development and those with acceptable glare exposure and effective daylighting;
and
Daylight and glare simulation report summarizing the analysis and modeling
results for each living and dining area that meets the requirement, as specified in
Annex D.

61

For 1-3(b)
Extracts of the tender specification or drawings showing the use of daylighting for
lift lobbies and corridors, staircases and carparks where applicable.
References

SS CP 38 Code of Practice for Artificial Lighting in Buildings


SS 531: Part 1 Code of Practice for Lighting of Work Places Indoor

Worked
Example
1-3(a)

Proposed development comprises a 20 storey apartments comprises 250 units.


Daylight and glare simulation has been conducted for the development. Based on
simulation, 80% of all units (i.e. 200 units) can achieve effective daylighting at a
distance of 6 m from building faade perimeters and meet the acceptable Unified
Glared Rating .
Unit type

No. of Units

1
2
3
4
5

50
50
40
85
25

Average Distance from


Faade Perimeter (m)
7.1
6.6
6.4
5.8
2.7

Percentage of units meeting the minimum requirement = (50+50+40+85) x100 = 90%


250
(50)(7.1)+50(6.6)+(40)(6.4)+(85)(5.8)+(25)(2.7)
250

Weighted average distance =


= 6m

Distance for
6 m from
building
perimeters

Distance from Faade


Perimeters (m)

Points Allocation

3.0
4.0 - 5.0
> 5.0

1
2
3

Points scored for 1-3(a) = 3 points


Worked
Example
1-3(b)

Proposed residential development with the following provision :


All lift lobbies (including private lift lobbies), corridors and staircases are designed to
have adequate daylighting that would eliminate the need for artificial lightings during
daytime.
75% of of the carpark areas have daylighting provision while the other 25% of the
carpark areas would need to employ the use of artificial lightings during daytime to
maintain proper lighting level.
1 point for lift lobbies and corridors
1 point for staircases
No point for carparks as it does not meet the minimum 80% of the applicable areas
Therefore, points scored for 1-3(b) = 2 points

62

RB 1-4 ARTIFICIAL LIGHTING

Objectives

Encourage the use of energy efficient lighting to minimise energy consumption


from lighting usage

Applicability

Applicable to lighting provisions for the type of usage specified in the SS 530
Clause 7 Lighting power budget pertaining to common areas and facilities within
the residential developments such as staircases, lobbies, corridors, indoor
carparks and landscape areas .
It is not applicable to lighting provisions for dwelling units.

Baseline
Standard

Maximum lighting power budget stated in SS 530 - Code of Practice for Energy
Efficiency Standard for Building Services and Equipment.

Requirements

Up to 10 points can be scored for the improvement in the lighting power budget in
common areas :
0.25 point for every percentage improvement in the lighting provisions over the
baseline standard. That is
Points scored = 0.25 x (% improvement)
Display lighting and specialised lighting are to be included in the calculation of
lighting power budget.
The design service illuminance, lamp efficacies and the light output ratios of
luminaries shall be in accordance with SS CP 38 Code of Practice for Artificial
Lighting in Buildings where applicable.

Documentary
Evidences

References

Lighting layout plan;


Lighting schedules showing the numbers, locations and types of luminaries
used;
Calculation of the proposed lighting power budget and the percentage;
improvement in the prescribed tabulated format as shown in the worked
example 1-4;
Tabulation showing the designed lux level and the minimum lux level based on
code requirement for the respective areas; and
Technical product information of the lighting luminaries used.

SS 530 Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency Standard for Building Services and
Equipment.

63

Worked
Example
1-4

(1) Determine the total power consumption based on the lighting layout design for
each area and light fitting types used
(2) Calculate the total power consumption based on the maximum lighting power
budget stated in SS 530.
(3) Calculate the percentage improvement in the total power consumption.

Table 1-4-1 : Total power consumption based on each fitting type


No. of
Fittings

Total power
consumption based
on fitting type

Light
Fitting
Type

Power
Consumption
per fitting
(W)

Ballast
Loss

(A)

(B)

(C)

(D)

(E)

Corridors

580

T5

1x28

70

2170

Staircase

420

T5

1x28

35

1085

Carparks

1500

T5

1x28

130

4030

Exterior
Lighting

200

LED
bollard

4x 1

28

140

Floodlight
CDM-TC

1x 35

15

585

Description

Areas
(m2)

(W)

[(C+D) x (E)]

Total :

8010

Table 1-4-2 : Total power consumption based on design and SS 530 requirements
Description

Areas
(m2)

Design Data

SS 530 Requirements

Total Power
Consumption
(by area)(W)

Design
Lighting Power
2
Budget (W/m )

Reference
Lighting Power
2
Budget (W/m )

Reference Total
Power Consumption
(by area) (W)

(A)

(F)

(F/A)

(H)

(H x A)

Corridors

580

2170

3.74

10

5800

Staircase

420

1085

2.85

2520

Carparks

1500

4030

2.69

7500

Exterior
Lighting

200

725

3.63

1000

Total :

8010

16820

% improvement in the lighting power budget

= [(HxA) - (F)] /(HxA ) x 100


= (16820 - 8010)/16820 x 100
= 52.38%

Points scored

= 0.25 x 52.38% = 13 points > 10 points (max)

Therefore, points scored for 1-4 should be 10 points

64

RB 1-5 VENTILATION IN CARPARKS

Objectives

Encourage the use of energy efficient design and control of ventilation systems in
carparks.

Applicability

Applicable to all carpark spaces in the development.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

1-5(a) 6 points can be scored for carpark spaces that are fully naturally ventilated.
1-5(b) For carparks that have to be mechanically ventilated, points can be scored for
the use of carbon monoxide (CO) sensors in regulating such demand based
on the mode of mechanical ventilation (MV) used; 4 points for carparks using
fume extract system and 3 points for those with MV with or without supply.
Note : Where there is a combination of different ventilation modes adopted for carpark
design, the points scored under this requirement will be prorated accordingly.

Documentary
Evidences

For 1-5 (a) and (b)


Plan layouts showing all carpark provisions for the development with highlights
of the carpark spaces that are designed to be naturally ventilated and/or
mechanical ventilated;
Plan layouts indicating the locations of CO sensors and the mode of ventilation
adopted for the design; and
Calculation showing the points allocation if there is a combination of different
ventilation mode adopted for the carpark design.

References

SS CP 553- Code of Practice for Air-Conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation in


Buildings.

Worked
Example
1-5

Proposed development has two levels of basement carparks. Level 1 basement


carpark (B1) is designed with more than 20% openings for natural ventilation and
fume extract system. Level 2 basement carpark (B2) is fully mechancially
ventilated. CO sensors are installed to control the ventilation system for both
carpark levels.
Areas of basement capark B1

= 700 m2

Areas of basement carpark B2

= 500 m2

Total areas

= 1200 m2

Points scored for 1-5

= (700/1200) x 4 + (500/1200) x 3
= 3.58 points

65

RB 1-6 LIFTS

Objectives

Encourage the use of energy efficient lifts.

Applicability

Applicable to all lifts in the development.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

1 point can be scored for the use of lifts with energy efficient features such as AC
variable voltage and variable frequency (VVVF) motor drive and energy efficient
features such as sleep mode.

Documentary
Evidences

Extracts of the tender specification indicating the types of lifts and related
features used; and
Technical information of the lifts.

References

Worked
Example
1-6

Proposed development has the following provision:


All lifts are VVVF motor drive with sleep mode features
1 point for the use of VVVF motor drive with sleep mode features.
Therefore, points scored for 1-6 = 1 point

66

RB 1-7 ENERGY EFFICIENT FEATURES

Objectives

Encourage the use of energy efficient features that are innovative and have positive
environmental impact in terms of energy saving.

Applicability

Applicable to practices and features that are not listed in the requirements under
Part 1 Energy Efficiency.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

(a) 0.5 point for the use of energy efficient equipment or products that are certified
by approved local certification body for at least 90% of the applicable equipment
type or products.(Up to 2 points)
(b) Up to 5 points can be scored for the use of the following energy efficient
features based on their potential environmental benefits and the extent of
coverage.
(i) Use of heat recovery devices

2 points for more than 50% of all dwelling units


1 point for at least 25% of all dwelling units
0.5 point for club house or other common facilities

(ii) Use of thermal insulation or cool paints on the east and west facing external
walls

2 points for window to wall ratio (WWR) of less than 0.5


1 point for WWR that is between 0.5 to 0.75
0.5 point for WWR of more than 0.75

(iii) Use of occupancy sensors for private lift lobbies, staircases, common toilets

1 point for at least 50 occupancy sensors installed


0.5 point for less than 50 occupancy sensors installed

(iv) Provision of vertical greenery system on building facades abutting the living,
dining and bedrooms areas of dwelling units and club house

2 points for more than 50% of building facades


1 point for at least 25% of building facades
0.5 point for clubhouse

(v) Provision of gas water heater

1 point for more than 90% of all dwelling units


0.5 point for between 50% to 90% of all dwelling units

(vi) Provision of clothes drying facilities and open spaces

1 point for more than 90% of all dwelling units


0.5 point for between 50% to 90% of all dwelling units

(vii) Provision of lifts with better energy efficient features (Up to 2 points)

2 points for the use of regenerative drive system for at least 90% of lifts
installed
1 point for the use of gearless drive system for at least 90% of lifts installed

(viii) Use of sun pipes for natural lighting.


1 point for more than 10 sun pipes
0.5 point for at least 5 sun pipes

67

Requirements

(ix) 0.5 point for the provision of ductless fans for basement ventilation.

- Contd

(x) 0.5 point for the computation of Energy Efficiency Index (EEI) for common
facilities of the development.
Calculation of EEI for Common Facilities :
EEI = (TEC / GFA) x 365 days
where:
(a) TEC
(b) GFA

: Total electricity consumption for common facilities (kWh/day)


: Gross floor area of development (m2)

The common facilities and the daily usage hours of these facilities are
pre-determined for consistency as shown in Table 1-7. They are to be used
in the computation for EEI. Other common facilities that are not listed should
be included under Others and the operation hours can be estimated based
on the likely usage pattern.
Table 1-7 : Common Facilities and Daily Usage Pattern
Description
A)

B)

C)

D)

E)

Mechanical Load
MV fan (plant room)
Car park fan
A/C for club house
A/C for lobbies
A/C for guard house
Domestic pump
Ejector pump
Booster pump
Sump pumps
Lift Load
Passenger lifts
Service lift
General lighting
Car park lighting - 24 hours operation
Car park lighting - 5 hours operation
Guard house lighting
Facade lighting
Landscape lighting - 12 hours operation
Landscape lighting - 5 hours operation
Lift lobbies, corridors & staircase lighting - 12 hours
operation
Lift lobbies, corridors & staircase lighting - 5 hours
operation
Club Facilities
Club house interior lighting
Power to Gym equipment, SPA, etc
Swimming pool filtration
Water features
Others
Facilities A
Facilities B

Daily Usage (hr)

9
4
12
12
24
2
2
3
0.5
2
2
24
5
12
5
12
5
12
5
12
6
12
8
To estimate
To estimate

Important notes : For features that are not listed in RB 1-7(i) to (x) above, the QP is
required to submit the details showing the positive environmental impacts and potential
energy savings of the proposed features to BCA for assessment.
68

Extracts of the tender specification showing the provision of the proposed

Documentary
Evidences

energy efficient features and the extent of implementation where applicable;


Technical product information on the energy efficient features used; and
Calculation of the potential energy savings that could be reaped from the use of

these features.
Calculation of the Energy Efficiency Index (EEI) using the pre-determined daily

usage pattern as in Table 1-7 and in the prescribed tabulated format as shown
in the worked example 1-7(x).
References

Worked
Example
1-7(x)

Background info :
Proposed residential development
consumption for common facilities.

with

the

following

estimated

electricity

Table 1-7(xi) : Estimated electricity consumption for common facilities


Description
A)

B)

C)

D)

Estimated
Load (KW)

Daily
Usage (hr)

Load per day


(KWh)

Mechanical Load
MV fan (plant room)
Carpark fan
A/C for club house
A/C for lobbies (1st sty & Basement)
A/C for guard house
Domestic pump
Ejector pump
Booster pump
Sump Pumps
Lift Load
Passenger Lifts
Service Lifts
General lighting
Carpark lighting 24 hours operation
Carpark lighting - 5 hours operation
Guard house lighting
Facade lighting
Landscape lighting - 12 hours operation
Landscape lighting - 5 hours operation
Lift lobbies, corridor& staircase Lighting 12 hours operation
Lift lobbies, corridor& staircase lighting 5 hours operation

9
320
8
0
2
70
13
28
12

9
4
12
12
24
2
2
3
0.5

81
1280
96
0
48
140
26
84
6

470
0

2
2

940
0

23
23
0.3
0
30
28

24
5
12
5
12
5

552
115
3.6
0
360
140

20

12

240

19

95

Club Facilities
Club house interior lighting
Power to Gym equipment, SPA, etc
Swimming Pool Filtration
Water Feature
Total kWh per day

12
85
50
25

12
6
12
8

144
510
600
200
5660.60

Calculation of EEI for Common Facilities :


Total electricity consumption per day = 5660.60 kWh/day
EEI

= (TEC / GFA) x 365 days


= (5660.60 / 40 000) x 365
= 51.65 kWh/m2/yr

Points scored for 1-7(x) = 0.5 point


69

RB 1-8 RENEWABLE ENERGY

Objectives

Encourage the use of renewable energy sources in buildings.

Applicability

Includes all renewable energy sources

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

Up to 20 points can be scored based on the percentage replacement of electricity by


the renewable energy source.
3 points for every 1% replacement of electricity (based on annual electricity
consumption exclude households usage) by renewable energy

Documentary
Evidences

Extracts of the tender specification and plans showing the location of the
renewable energy system and the extent of implementation;

Technical product information on the salient features of the renewable energy


system and the expected renewable energy generated; and

Calculation of the percentage replacement of electricity and the total annual


electricity consumption of the development.

References

Worked
Example
1-8

A residential development with GFA of 15,000m2.


The Energy Efficiency Index for its common facilities is 50 kWh/m2/year
The installation of solar array on the roof of its open car park was estimated to
generate 7,500 kWh annually
Total electricity consumption of the developments common areas
= 50 x 15,000 = 750,000 kWh/year
Percentage of replacement of electricity by renewable energy
= 7,500 / 750,000 x 100%
= 1%
Points scored for 1-8 for 1% replacement of electricity = 3 points

70

(II) Other Green Requirements


Part 2 Water Efficiency

RB2-1
RB2-2
RB2-3

Water Efficient Fittings


Water Usage Monitoring
Irrigation System and Landscaping

RB 2-1 WATER EFFICIENT FITTINGS

Objectives

Reduce the use of potable water by using water efficient fittings covered under the
Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme (WELS).

Applicability

Applicable to the water fittings covered by the WELS :

Basin taps and mixers


Flushing cistern
Sink/bib taps and mixers

Shower taps and mixers or showerheads


All other water fittings

Baseline
Standard

As specified under Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme (WELS).

Requirements

Up to 10 points can be scored based on the number and water efficiency rating of
the fitting type used.

Documentary
Evidences

WELS Rating

Water Efficiency

Weightage for Point Allocation

Very Good

Excellent

10

Extracts of the tender specification showing all the water fitting provisions for
the development;
Water fitting schedules showing the numbers, types and the approved rating of
the proposed fittings in the prescribed tabulated format shown in the worked
example; and
Calculation showing the percentage of proposed water fittings that are
approved under WELS.

References

For more information about WELS, refer to


http://www.pub.gov.sg/wels/Pages /default.aspx

72

Worked
Example
2-1

Example of a water fitting schedule showing the numbers, types and the approved
rating of the proposed fitting for a residential development (including common
facilities such as clubhouse toilets).
Ref.

Water Fitting Type

WELS rating

Mandatory
requirement
MWELS

Excellent

Very
Good

Good

Total no.
based on
fitting type

Shower taps and mixers

45

45

Basin taps and mixers

10

150

160

Sink/bib taps and mixers

50

55

Flushing cisterns

10

50

60

Urinals and urinal flush


valves for club house

10

10

Total no. based on rating (A)

35

245

50

A =330

Weightage (B)

10

Total (AXB)

350

1960

(AxB) =2310

Points scored

= (AxB) / A
=2310/330
= 7 points

73

RB 2-2 WATER USAGE MONITORING

Objectives

Promote the use of private meters for better control and monitoring of major water
usage.

Applicability

Applicable to sub-metering provisions for major water uses of the building


developments.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

1 point can be scored if private meters are provided for all major water uses i.e.
irrigation system, swimming pools and other water features where applicable.

Documentary
Evidences

Extracts from the tender specification stating the locations and provision of
private meters for all major water uses.

Schematic drawings of cold water distribution system showing the location of


the private meters provided.

References

74

RB 2-3 IRRIGATION SYSTEM AND LANDSCAPING

Objectives

Reduce potable water consumption by provision of suitable systems that utilise


rainwater or recycled water for landscape irrigation and use of plants that require
minimal irrigation to reduce potable water consumption.

Applicability

Applicable to residential development with landscaping provision.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

2-3(a) 1 point can be scored for the use of non-potable water including rainwater
for landscape irrigation.
2-3(b) 1 point can be scored if more than 50% of the landscape areas are served
by water efficient irrigation system with features such as automatic sub-soil
drip irrigation system with rain sensor control.
2-3(c) 1 point can be scored if at least 80% of the landscape areas consist of
drought tolerant plants or plants that require minimal irrigation.

Documentary
Evidences

For 2-3(a)
Extracts of the tender specification showing how the non-potable water source
is to be provided;
Relevant drawings showing the location and design of the non-potable water

source; and
For rainwater harvesting and storage system, approval letter from PUB

is to be provided.
For 2-3(b)
Extracts of the tender specification showing the provision and details of water
efficient irrigation system;
Relevant layout plans showing the overall landscape areas and the areas that

would be served using the system; and


Calculation showing the percentage of the landscape areas that would be

served using the system.


For 2-3(c)
Relevant layout plans showing the overall landscape areas and the areas that
use drought tolerant plants or plants that require minimal irrigation.

References

Calculation showing the percentage of the landscape areas that use drought
tolerant plants or plants that require minimal irrigation.

The list of drought tolerant or resistant plant species may be obtained from the
online website: http://florafaunaweb.nparks.gov.sg/

75

(II) Other Green Requirements


Part 3 Environmental
Protection

RB3-1
RB3-2
RB3-3
RB3-4
RB3-5
RB3-6

Sustainable Construction
Sustainable Products
Greenery Provision
Environmental Management Practice
Green Transport
Stormwater Management

RB 3-1 SUSTAINABLE CONSTRUCTION

Objectives

Encourage the adoption of building designs, construction practices and materials


that are environmentally friendly and sustainable.

Applicability

Generally applicable to all building developments.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

3-1(a)

Up to 5 points can be scored with the use of (i) Green Cements and
(ii) Recycled Concrete Aggregates (RCA) and Washed Copper Slag
(WCS) as detailed in the following para 3-1(a)(i) and 3-1(a)(ii) :

3-1(a)(i) 1 point can be scored for use of Green Cements with approved industrial
by-product (such as Ground Granulated Blastfurnace Slag (GGBS), silica
fume, fly ash) to replace Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC) by at least 10%
by mass for superstructural works.
3-1(a)(ii) Up to 4 points can be scored for use of Recycled Concrete Aggregates
(RCA) or Washed Copper Slag (WCS) from approved sources to replace
coarse or fine aggregates for concrete production of main building
elements.
1 point for every incremental of 0.5 times (0.5x) of the usage requirement
(Up to 2x)
Quantity of RCA /WCS (tons)

Points Allocation

0.5 x usage requirement

1.0 x usage requirement

1.5 x usage requirement

2.0 x usage requirement

where usage requirement = 0.03 x Gross Floor Area (GFA in m2)


The RCA/WCS quantity (in tons) used for the concrete production of main building
elements can be derived from the concrete volume comprising these recycled
materials and based on the following conversion factor:
RCA (tons)= 1.0 (tons/m3) X (concrete vol in m3) X (RCA replacement rate)%
WCS (tons)= 0.7(tons/m3) X (concrete vol in m3) X (WCS replacement rate)%
Important notes :
For structural building elements, the use of RCA and WCS shall be limited to maximum 10%
replacement by mass of coarse/fine aggregates or as approved by the relevant authorities.

77

Requirements
Contd

3-1(b) Up to 5 points are allocated to encourage more efficient concrete usage for
building components based on the percentage reduction in the prescribed
Concrete Usage Index (CUI) limit.
Table 3-1 (b) Points allocation for project CUI
Project CUI (m3/m2)

Points Allocation

0.70

0.60

0.50

0.40

0.35

Note : Concrete Usage Index (CUI) is an indicator of the amount of concrete used to
construct the superstructure that includes both the structural and non-structural
elements. CUI does not include the concrete used for external works and substructural works such as basements and foundations. CUI is defined as the volume
of concrete in cubic metres needed to cast a square metre of constructed floor area.
It is expressed as:
Concrete Usage Index =

Documentary
Evidences

Concrete Volume in m3
Constructed Floor Area in m2

For 3-1(a)(i) & a(ii)


Extract of tender specification and concrete mix design showing the detailed
usage of Green Cements
Extract of tender specification and concrete mix design showing the detailed
usage of RCA and WCS.
Evidence of site delivery of these materials where applicable.
For 3-1(b)
Architectural and structural plan layout, elevation and sectional plans showing
the type of wall system used, the dimensions and sizes of all the building and
structural elements; and
Summary showing the quantity of concrete for each floor level in the prescribed
tabulated format shown in worked example 3-1(b). The calculation should
include all the building elements as listed in the worked example and the
derivation of the concrete volume should be detailed and made available for
evaluation.

78

Worked
Example
3-1(a)

Proposed development comprises a 15 storey residential block with a basement


carpark and the following details :
Gross Floor Area (GFA) = 10,000 m2
Total Concrete Usage with replacement of coarse and fine aggregate with recycled
concrete aggregate and washed copper slag = 6 000 m3
(i) Use of Green Cements to replace 10% of OPC for superstructural works
Points scored = 1 point
(ii) Use of recycled concrete aggregates (RCA) to replace coarse aggregate and
the use of washed copper slag (WCS) to replace fine aggregate for main
building elements with a replacement rate of 10%.
Usage requirement = 0.03 x 10000 = 0.03 x 10000 = 300 tons
RCA (tons) = 1.0 (tons/m3) X (concrete vol in m3) X (RCA replacement rate)%
= 1.0 (6 000)(10%) = 600 tons
As the total quantity used (i.e. 600 tons) for replacement of coarse aggregate
is 2 x Usage requirement :
Therefore, points scored for RCA under 3-1(a)(ii) = 4 points
WCS (tons)= 0.7(tons/m3) X (concrete vol in m3) X (WCS replacement rate)%
= 0.7 (6 000)(10%) = 420 tons
Points scored for WCS under 3-1(a)(ii) = 2 points
Points scored for 3-1(a)(i) &(a)(ii) = 1(for green cement) +4 (for RCA)
+2 (for WCS) = 7 points > 5 points(max)
Hence, total points scored for 3-1(a)(i) & (a)(ii) should be 5 points

Worked
Example
3-1(b)

Proposed development comprises a 15 storey residential block with a basement


carpark and the following details :
Concrete usage for the superstructure

Constructed floor areas

= 587 m3
For 1st storey
nd
th
From 2 to 15 storey = 5400 m3
(including roof level)

= 1000 m2
For 1st storey
nd
th
From 2 to 15 storey = 14000 m2
(including roof level)

Therefore,
Total concrete usage = 5987 m3

Therefore,
Total constructed floor area = 15000 m2

Note : The concrete usage for foundation and two basements are not required to be
included.
5987
Concrete Usage Index CUI =
= 0.4 m3/m2
Refer to the
15000
following
Based on the point allocation shown in Table 3-1(b)
Table 3-1(b)
for more
3
2
3
2
CUI of 0.4 m /m 0.4 m /m
details

Therefore, point scored = 4 points

79

Worked
Example
3-1(b)
Contd

Table 3-1(b) Concrete Usage Index


COMPUTATION OF CONCRETE USAGE INDEX
Project Reference No.: AXXXX-00001-2007

RESIDENTIAL BLDG

Total no. of storey for the project: 15

Block No : A
Thickness (mm) or
size (mm x mm)

Volume of
concrete (m3)

Remark *

1.1 Columns

200x400, 200x200

72

Precast

1.2 Beams

200x400, 200x500

145

Precast

150,200

265

Post
tensioned

1.4 Staircases

150

30

Precast

1.5 Suspended structures like


planter boxes, bay windows,
ledges etc

150

10

Precast

1.6 Parapets

150

RC

1.7 External walls loadbearing walls

Nil

1.8 External walls


non-loadbearing walls

125

15

1.9 Internal walls


loadbearing walls

200

40

Structural System
1

1st storey

1.3 Slabs

_
RC
RC

1.10 Internal walls nonloadbearing walls

Nil

1.11 Others (kerbs, ramps,


services risers, etc)

Not required

Light
weight
concrete

0
5

RC

Total volume of concrete for this storey (m3)

587

Total constructed floor area for this storey (m2)

1000

Typical floor layout


2.1 Columns

200x400, 200x200

55

Precast

2.2 Beams

200x400, 200x500

45

Precast

150,200

160

Post
tensioned

2.4 Staircases

150

30

Precast

2.5 Suspended structures like


planter boxes, bay windows,
ledges etc

150

10

Precast

2.6 Parapets

150

RC

2.7 External walls loadbearing walls

Nil

2.8 External walls


non-loadbearing walls

125

15

2.3 Slabs

80

RC

Worked
Example
3-1(b)
Contd

COMPUTATION OF CONCRETE USAGE INDEX


Project Reference No.: AXXXX-00001-2007

RESIDENTIAL BLDG

Total no. of storey for the project: 15

Block No : A
Thickness (mm) or
size (mm x mm)

Structural System
2

Volume of
concrete (m3)

Remark *

2nd storey to 30th storey ( Typical floor layout)


2.9 Internal walls
loadbearing walls

200

40

RC

2.10.Internal walls nonloadbearing walls

Nil

2.11 Others (kerbs, ramps,


services risers etc)

Nil

Volume of concrete for one storey (m3)


Constructed floor area for one storey

360
933.3

Total volume of concrete for 2nd to 15th storey


(including roof level)

360 X 15 = 5400

Total constructed floor area for 2nd to 15th storey (m2)


(including roof level)
Total volume of concrete for this project (m3)
Total constructed floor area for this project (m2)
Concrete Usage Index (CUI in m3/m2)

933.3 x 15 = 14000
5987
15000
0.4

* To indicate if the structural elements is of precast concrete, post-tensioned concrete, high


strength concrete (> Grade 60 ) or reinforced concrete (RC) under the Remarks column
Important notes : The quantities of the concrete for all the structural and non-structural
elements for each floor level are computed. All the elements listed in the table such as
columns, beams, slabs, suspended structures (like planter boxes, bay windows and ledges
etc) , parapets, walls and others (service risers, kerbs, ramps etc) are to be included. The
concrete usages for foundation and basement works are excluded in CUI computation.

81

RB 3-2 SUSTAINABLE PRODUCTS

Objectives

Encourage the use of products that are environmentally friendly and sustainable.

Applicability

Applicable to non-structural and architectural building components.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

Up to 8 points are allocated to encourage the use of appropriate environmentally


friendly products that are certified by approved local certification body. The
products used should have considerably contributions in the overall environmental
sustainability standard of the development. Points scored will be based on the
weightage, extent of coverage and impact.
The weightage given will be based on the extent of environmental friendliness as
determined by the approved local certification body and are subject to BCAs
evaluation.
Extent of Environmental
Friendliness of Products

Weightage for Point


Allocation

Good

0.5

Very Good

1.5

Excellent

The use of environmental friendly products or recycled materials used for all
dwelling units of the development will be considered as high impact (1 point).
Items that are used for all common areas, external works and communal facilities
are considered as low impact (0.5 point).
Note : The point allocated for low volatile organic compound (VOC) paints and adhesives
certified by approved local certification body can be found in RB 4-2 and hence shall not be
included in the scoring for RB 3-2.

Documentary
Evidences

Extracts from the tender specification and drawings showing the requirements

to incorporate the environmental friendly products that are certified with


approved local certification body;
Certification details from approved local certification body such as the material

certification standards, rating and product reference; and


Technical product information and delivery records.

References

For more info on product certification, refer to


http://www.sgbc.sg/green-certifications/product-certifications/
http://www.greenlabel.sg/

82

Worked
Example
3-2 (i)

1. Determine if the environmental friendly products selected are certified with


approved local certification body.
2. Check if the products used are meant for all dwelling units of the development
and can be considered as high impact. Products that are meant for common
areas and external works such as toilets, lobbies and landscaping areas are
considered as low impact.
3. Check on the extent of environmental friendliness of the products and the rating
granted by the approved certification body.
Example of a proposed residential development using the following products
that are rated as Good by approved local certification body.
Products and Extent of
coverage

With
approved
certification

Points
allocated
based on
impact (A)

Weightage
based on
rating (B)

Points
scored
(AxB)

Waterproofing for
all units toilets

Yes

0.5

0.5

Timber doors for


all dwelling units

Yes

0.5

0.5

Bamboo Flooring
for all units
bedrooms

Yes

0.5

0.5

Roof
waterproofing

No

NA

NA

Points scored for 3-2 (i) = 0.5+0.5+0.5 = 1.5 points


Worked
Example
3-2 (ii)

Note : Certain products can have more environmentally friendly features than others. Other
than recycled materials, they may have features like low VOC assembly or manufactured
with resource efficient processes, durability etc that will render the products more
environmental friendly than others. If the certified products selected are more environmental
friendly and are given a better rating by the approved local certification body, a higher
weightage can be considered in point scoring.

Example of a proposed development with the following provisions :


(a) Use of certified wooden doors for all dwelling units. Product is rated as
Very Good by approved local certification body.
(b) Use of certified bamboo flooring for all units bedrooms. Product is rated as
Excellent by approved local certification body.
(c) Use of certified roof waterproofing coating. Product is rated as Excellent
rating by approved local certification body.
Products and Extent of
coverage

With
approved
certification

Points
allocated
based on
impact (A)

Weightage
based on
rating (B)

Points
scored
(AxB)

(a)

Wooden doors for


all dwelling units

Yes

1.5

1.5

(b)

Bamboo flooring
for all units
bedrooms

Yes

(c)

Roof
waterproofing

Yes

0.5

Therefore, points scored for 3-2 (ii) = 1.5 +2 +1 = 4.5 points


83

RB 3-3 GREENERY PROVISION

Objectives

Encourage greater use of greenery and restoration of existing trees to reduce heat
island effect.

Applicability

Applicable to building developments with landscaping areas.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements 3-3(a) Up to 6 points can be scored for the provision of greenery within the
developments including roof top/ sky garden and green roof.
Green Plot Ratio (GnPR) is calculated by considering the 3D volume
covered by plants using the following Leaf Area Index (LAI)
Plant
group
LAI

Area

Trees

Palms

Shrubs &
Groundcover

Turf

Open Canopy = 2.5


Intermediate Canopy = 3.0
Dense Canopy = 4.0

Solitary = 2.5
Cluster = 4.0

Monocot = 3.5
Dicot = 4.5

Turf = 2.0

All = 60 m2

Solitary = 20 m2
Cluster = 17 m2

Planted area

Planted
area

Green Plot Ratio (GnPR) = Total Leaf Area / Site Area


GnPR
1.0 to < 2.0
2.0 to < 3.0
3.0 to < 4.0
4.0 to < 5.0
5.0 to < 6.0

6.0

Points Allocation
1
2
3
4
5
6
84

3-3(b) 1 point for restoration, conservation or relocation of existing trees on site.


3-3(c) 1 point for the use of compost recycled from horticulture waste.

Documentary
Evidences

For 3-3(a)
Plan layouts showing the site area as well as the greenery that is provided
within the development (including a listing of the number of trees, palms,
shrubs, turf and the respective sub category and LAI values); and
Calculation showing the extent of the greenery provision in the prescribed
tabulated format as in worked example 3-3(a).
For 3-3(b)
Site layouts showing the existing and final locations (where applicable) and
number of the trees to be restored or conserved or relocated.
For 3-3(c)
Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirements to use compost
recycled from horticulture waste.

Exceptions

TREES AND PALMS SPACING (CENTRE-TO-CENTRE)


(a) If the selected trees and palms are to be planted at 2m from trunk-to-trunk as
illustrated below, the leaf area shall be calculated as the product of LAI value and
planted area (in m2).
2m

COLUMNAR TREES
(b) For trees that have tight, columnar crowns, the canopy area of 12 m2 is to be
adopted for calculation of leaf area. These species include, but not limited to the
following :
Garcinia cymosa forma pendula
Garcinia subelliptica
Polyalthia longifolia
Carallia brachiata
. Gnetum gnemon

References

The plant species, its sub categories and LAI values may be obtained from the
online website: http://florafaunaweb.nparks.gov.sg

85

Worked
Example
3-3(a)

(1) Determine the number of trees, palms and the areas for shrub and turfs and
other greenery area
(2) The Leaf Area Index (LAI) of the individual plant species and its canopy area are
predetermined design parameters applicable for all developments.
(3) The plant species sub categories and its LAI values can be obtained from the
online website: http://florafaunaweb.nparks.gov.sg/ (see example below) by
searching the common / scientific names of the plants.
(4) Compute the green areas as shown in the Table 3-3(a) below
Table 3-3(a) Calculation of the Green Plot Ratio
Category

(A)

(B)

(C)

(A) x (B) x (C)

LAI
value

Canopy
Area

Qty/
Planted
Area

Leaf Area

Open Canopy

2.5

60 m2

0 no.

Intermediate
Canopy

3.0

60 m2

8 no.

1440

Dense Canopy

4.0

60 m2

12 no.

2880

Intermediate
columnar canopy *

3.0

12 m2

4 no.

144

Solitary

2.5

30 m2

10 no.

750

Solitary

2.5

NA

20 m2

50

Cluster

4.0

17 m2

10 no.

680

Monocot

3.5

NA

0 m2

Dicot

4.5

NA

20 m2

90

Turf (m2)

Turf

2.0

NA

90 m2

180

Vertical
Greenery (m2)

2.0

NA

10 m

Trees (no.)

Palms
(no.or m2)

Sub category

(trunk-to trunk 2m )

Shrubs (m2)

Note : * refer to the exceptions

Total Leaf Area :

20
6234

Note: Green roof landscaping would be calculated as per illustrated above


Assume site area is 2000m2
Green Plot Ratio (GnPR) = total leaf area / site area
= 6234 / 2000 = 3.117 < 4.0
where GnPR = 3.0 to < 4.0
Therefore, points scored for 3-3(a) = 3 points
86

RB 3-4 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PRACTICE

Objectives

Encourage the adoption of environmental friendly practices during construction and


building operation.

Applicability

Generally applicable to all building developments.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

3-4(a) 1 point can be scored if effective implementation of environmental friendly


programmes including monitoring and setting targets to minimise energy
use, water use and construction waste are in place.
3-4(b) 1 point can be scored if main builder has good track records in the adoption
of sustainable, environmentally friendly and considerate practices during
construction such as the Green and Gracious Builder Award.
3-4(c) 1 point can be scored if the building quality is assessed under the
Construction Quality Assessment System (CONQUAS) and an additional
one (1) point can be scored if the project is assessed under Quality Mark.
3-4(d) Up to 1 point if the developer, main builder, M & E consultant and architect
are ISO 14000 certified. 0.25 point is allocated for each firm that is certified.
3-4(e) Up to 1 point if the project team comprises one Certified Green Mark
Manager (GMM)(0.5 point), one Certified Green Mark Facility Manager
(GMFM)(0.5 point) or one Certified Green Mark Professional (GMP)(1 point).
3-4(f) 1 point can be scored for the provision of building users guide with details of
the environmental friendly facilities and features within the building and their
uses in achieving the intended environment performance during building
operation.
3-4(g) 1 point can be scored for the provision of facilities or recycling bins at each
block of development for collection and storage of different recyclable waste
such as paper, glass, plastic etc.

Documentary
Evidences

For 3-4(a)
Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirements for builder to
provide and implement environmental friendly programmes to minimise energy
use, water use and construction waste; and
Details of the environmental friendly programmes implemented.
For 3-4(b)
A certified true copy of the main builders Green and Gracious Builder Award; or
Details of track records in the adoption of sustainable, environmentally friendly
and considerate practices during construction.
For 3-4(c)
Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirement to adopt
CONQUAS and Quality Mark where applicable.
87

For 3-4(d)
A certified true copy of the ISO 14000 certificate of developer, main contractor,
M & E consultant and architect where applicable.
For 3-4(e)
A certified true copy of the certificate of Green Mark Manager or Green Mark
Facility Manager and Green Mark Professional where applicable and a
confirmation of their involvement and contribution in the project.
For 3-4(f)
A copy of the building users guide containing the details of the environmental
friendly facilities and features within the building and their uses in achieving the
intended environment performance during building operation.
For 3-4(g)
Plan layout showing the location of the recycling bins for collection and storage
of different recyclable waste.

References

88

RB 3-5 GREEN TRANSPORT

Objectives

Promote environmental friendly transport options and facilities to reduce pollution


from individual car use.

Applicability

Generally applicable to all building developments.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

3-5(a) 1 point can be scored for design that provides good access (< 500m walking
distance) to public transport networks such as MRT/LRT stations and bus
stops.
3-5(b) 1 point can be scored for provision of covered walkway to facilitate
connectivity and the use of public transport.
3-5(c) 1 point can be scored for provision of electric vehicle charging stations within
the development. (Minimum provision : 1 charging station for every 100
carpark lots, round up to the nearest hundreds (Cap at 5 charging stations)
3-5(d) Up to 1 point can be scored for the provision of covered/sheltered bicycles
parking lots:
o
o

Documentary
Evidences

1 point for at least 10% of total number of dwelling units


0.5 point for at least 5% of total number of dwelling units

For 3-5(a)
Site layout plan in the context of the surrounding area showing the location of
the development site and the location of the MRT/LRT stations and bus stops.
For 3-5(b)
Site layout plan showing the connection of covered walkway from the
development to the MRT/LRT stations or bus stops; and
Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirement to provide covered
walkway.
For 3-5(c)
Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirement to provide electric
vehicle charging stations.
For 3-5(d)
Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirement to provide
covered/sheltered bicycles parking lots for the development and the total
quantity of bicycle lots provided.

References

89

RB 3-6 STORMWATER MANAGEMENT

Objectives

Encourage the treatment of stormwater runoff through provision of infiltration or design


features before discharge to public drains.

Applicability

Generally applicable to all building developments.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements Up to 3 points can be scored for the treatment of stormwater runoff.

3 points for treatment of run-off from more than 35% of total site area or paved
area

2 points for treatment of run-off from more than 10% to up to 35% of total site
area

1 point for treatment of run-off from up to 10% of total site area

Note:
(1) The treatment of stormwater runoff shall be through provision of infiltration or
design features as recommended in PUBs ABC Waters design Guidelines.
(2) Points can be scored if the treatment of run-off covers more than 35% of total
paved area of the site. If the percentage of total paved area is less than 35%, points
can only be scored based on total site area.

Documentary
Evidences

Site layout plans indicating the total site area, total paved area within the site as

well as the total catchment areas where runoff are treated through the provision of
ABC Waters design features. Other information such as the total paved areas
within the catchment areas, treatment areas and the hydraulic retention time of the
design features are to be included where applicable.
Drainage plan, schematic plan, location plan and section details of ABC Waters

Design features such as the specification of filtration layer, transition layer and
drainage layer, sub-soil drainage system, overflow arrangement, plant list etc.
Relevant design calculations and simulation/ modeling results are to be provided
where applicable.

References

Public Utilities Board (PUB), Singapore publication on


- ABC Waters Design Guidelines
- Engineering Procedure for ABC Waters Design Features
For more information about ABC Waters Design Guidelines, refer to
http://www.pub.gov.sg/abcwaters/abcwatersdesignguidelines/Pages/ABCDesignGuidelines.aspx

90

Worked
Example
3-6

A development has a site area of 1000 m2 that includes 500 m2 paved area. It was
planned that 300 m2 of the site area would be treated through a bio-retention system
designed according to PUBs ABC Waters design guidelines.
Based on total site area
Percentage of run-off being treated = 300/1000 x 100% = 30%
Points scored = 2 points
Based on paved area
If 200 m2 out of the 300m2 catchment area treated, was paved
Percentage of run-off being treated = 200/500 x 100% = 40%
Points scored = 3 points
Therefore, points scored for RB 3-6 = 3 points

91

(II) Other Green Requirements


Part 4 Indoor
Environmental
Quality

RB4-1
RB4-2
RB4-3
RB4-4

Noise Level
Indoor Air Pollutants
Waste Disposal
Indoor Air Quality in Wet Areas

RB 4-1 NOISE LEVEL

Objectives

Recognise buildings that are designed to consider the potential noise levels within
the dwelling units are maintained at an appropriate level.

Applicability

Generally applicable to all building developments.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

1 point can be scored if the building is designed to achieve ambient internal noise
level as specified :

55 dB (6am-10 pm) LeqA


45 dB (10 pm-6 am) LeqA

For developments that are in close proximity to road with heavy traffic, flyover or
highway, it is necessary to have a detailed analysis conducted by the acoustic
consultant. Points can only be scored if the recommendations from the acoustic
consultant are implemented.

Documentary
Evidences

Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirement to design the

occupied space with the ambient sound levels; and


A report of the detailed analysis and recommendations from acoustic

consultant on how the designed ambient sound levels can be met where
applicable.

References

93

RB 4-2 INDOOR AIR POLLUTANTS

Objectives

Minimise airborne contaminants, mainly from inside sources to promote a healthy


indoor environment.

Applicability

Generally applicable to all building developments.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

4-2(a) 1 point can be scored for the use of low volatile organic compounds (VOC)
paints certified by approved local certification body for at least 90% of the
internal wall areas.
4-2(b) 1 point can be scored for the use of environmentally friendly adhesives
certified by approved local certification body for at least 90% of the
applicable building works or areas.

Documentary
Evidences

For 4-2(a)
Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirement to use low VOC
paints that are certified by approved local certification body or equivalent.

For 4-2(b)
Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirement to use adhesive
with low emission formaldehyde and are certified by approved local certification
body or equivalent for all composite wood products used.

References

94

RB 4-3 WASTE DISPOSAL

Objectives

Minimise airborne contaminants from waste.

Applicability

Generally applicable to all developments.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

1 point can be scored if the refuse chutes are located at open ventilation areas
such as service balconies or common corridors

Documentary
Evidences

References

Plan layouts showing the location of the refuse chutes for all typical dwelling
units.

95

RB 4-4 INDOOR AIR QUALITY IN WET AREAS

Objectives

Encourage provision of adequate natural ventilation and daylighting in wet areas.

Applicability

Generally applicable to all wet areas such as kitchens, bathrooms and toilets of the
developments.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

Up to 2 points can be scored if there is provision for adequate natural ventilation


and daylighting in wet areas i.e. kitchens, bathrooms and toilets.

Documentary
Evidences

References

2 points for more than 90% of all applicable areas


1 point for at least 50% to 90% of all applicable areas

Plan layouts showing the location of the window openings of the kitchens,
bathrooms and toilets for all typical dwelling units.

96

(II) Other Green Requirements


Part 5 Other Green
Features

RB5-1

Green Features and Innovations

RB 5-1 OTHER GREEN FEATURES

Objectives

Encourage the use of green features that are innovative and have positive
environmental impact on water efficiency, environmental protection and indoor
environmental quality of the buildings.

Applicability

Generally applicable to all building developments.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

Up to 7 points can be scored for the use of the following green features depending
on their potential environmental benefits and the extent of coverage.
Water Efficiency
(i) Use of self cleaning faade system

2 points for more than 75% of the applicable facades areas


1 point for more than 50% of the applicable facades areas
0.5 point for at least 25% of the applicable facades areas

(ii) Use of integrated basin/cistern pedestal system

2 points for more than 50% of all dwelling units flushing cisterns
1 point for more than 25% of all dwelling units flushing cisterns
0.5 point for at least 10% of all dwelling units flushing cisterns

(iii) Use of grey water recycling system

2 points for all blocks of the development.


1 point for at least one block of the development.

(iv) Provision of system to recycle surface runoff from the vertical green wall and
sky garden
1 point for at least 25% of the green areas
0.5 point for less than 25% of the green areas

(v) Use of water efficient washing machine with WELS Good rating and above
1 point for more than 90% of all dwelling units.
0.5 point for at least 50% of all dwelling units.

Environmental Protection
(i) Use of precast toilets

2 points for more than 75% of all toilets


1 point for more than 50% of all toilets
0.5 point for at least 25% of all toilets

(ii) Provision of green roof and roof top garden

1 point for more than 50% of the roof areas


0.5 point for at least 25% of the roof areas

(iii) Provision of vertical greening in common areas

2 points for more than 75% of the applicable wall areas


1 point for more than 50% of the applicable wall areas
0.5 point for at least 25% of the applicable wall areas

(iv) 1 point for the provision of double refuse chutes for separating recyclable from
non-recyclable waste.
(v) 0.5 point for the use of non-chemical termite treatment system.
98

(vi) 0.5 point for the provision of at least 5 nos. of compost bins to recycle organic
waste.
(vii) 0.5 point for the use of non-chemical water treatment system for swimming
pools.
(viii) Conservation of existing building structure or building envelopes (by areas).

2 points for conserving more than 50% of the existing structure or building
envelope
1 point for conserving at least 25% of the existing structure or building
envelope

(ix) Buildable design with developments buildability scores (BScore) above the
prevailing minimum requirement (Refer to COP on Buildable Design).

(x)

1 point for BScore > 5 points above minimum requirement


0.5 point for BScore > 3 to 5 points above minimum requirement

Computation of carbon footprint of the development comprising energy


usage data of materials production and on-site construction of building
materials listed in the prescribed form.
1 point for the submission of complete carbon footprint calculation for all building
materials listed and in the prescribed format or a complete carbon footprint report
of the development prepared by an independent carbon consultant
0.5 point for the submission of carbon footprint calculation for any four building
materials listed and in the prescribed format

(xi) 1 point for the computation of Concrete Usage Index (CUI) of the building
development
(xii) Adoption of demolition protocol to maximise resource recovery of demolition
materials for reuse or recycling.
2 points for recovery rate of more than 35% crushed concrete waste to be sent to
the approved recyclers with proper facilities
1 point for recovery rate of at least 20% crushed concrete waste to be sent to the
approved recyclers with proper facilities
Refer to details at http://www.bca.gov.sg/SustainableConstruction/sc_demolition.html for compliance.

Indoor Air Quality


1 point for the use of pneumatic waste collection system.
Others
0.5 point for the use of siphonic rainwater discharge system at roof.
Important notes : For features that are not listed above, the QP is required to submit the
details showing the positive environmental impacts, possible savings and benefits of the
proposed features to BCA for assessment.

Documentary
Evidences

Extracts of the tender specification showing the provision of the specific green
features used and the extent of implementation where applicable;

Technical product information (including drawings and supporting documents)


of the green features;

A summary sheet listing the breakdown and the extent of implementation as


well as the total requirements for the same intended purpose for the specific
green features used; and
99

Documentary
Evidences

Quantified evidences on the potential environmental benefits that the features


can bring to the development.

Contd

The carbon footprint calculation to be submitted in the following prescribed form


and format.

References

Computation of Concrete Usage Index (CUI) and supporting documents as


stated under Part 3 RB 3-1 (b)

Demolition audit form showing the summary of the total and actual quantity of
concrete waste and delivery records or receipts from approved recycling firm.

100

Annex B-2
SCORING METHODOLOGY & DOCUMENTATION

Non-Residential Building Criteria

(I) Energy Related Requirements


Part 1 Energy Efficiency

NRB 1-1
NRB 1-2
NRB 1-3
NRB 1-4
NRB 1-5
NRB 1-6
NRB 1-7
NRB 1-8
NRB 1-9
NRB 1-10
NRB 1-11

Thermal Performance of Building Envelope-ETTV


Air-Conditioning System
Building Envelope Design / Thermal Parameters
Natural Ventilation/Mechanical Ventilation
Daylighting
Artificial Lighting
Ventilation in Carparks
Ventilation in Common Areas
Lifts and Escalators
Energy Efficient Practices and Features
Renewable Energy

NRB 1-1 THERMAL PERFORMANCE OF BUILDING ENVELOPE - ETTV

Objectives

Enhance overall thermal performance of building envelope to minimise heat gain


thus reducing the overall cooling load requirement.

Applicability

Applicable to air-conditioned building spaces with aggregate areas > 500 m2.

Baseline
Standard

Maximum permissible ETTV = 50 W/m2


ETTV stands for Envelope Thermal Transfer Value.
The computation of ETTV shall be based on the methodology specified in the Code
on Envelope Thermal Performance for Buildings issued by BCA.

Requirements

Up to 12 points can be scored for building envelope with better thermal


performance than the baseline standard :
1.2 points for every reduction of 1 W/m2 in ETTV from the baseline.
Points scored = 1.2 x (50 ETTV) where ETTV 50 W/m2
For developments consisting of more than one building, the weighted average of
the ETTVs based on the faade areas of these buildings shall be used as the basis
for point allocation.
That is
ETTV

Weighted
average

= (ETTVbldg xAbldg) / Adevt

where ETTVbldg = ETTV for a building (W/m2)


Abldg

= Summation of all facade areas that enclose all the air-conditioning


areas (m2) in a building

Adevt

= Summation of total applicable facade areas of all buildings within the


development (m2) (i.e. Abldg)

Exception: For buildings that are underground, NRB 1-1 may be excluded in the
computation. The score obtained under NRB 1-2 will be pro-rated accordingly.

Documentary
Evidences

References

Architectural elevation drawings showing the composition of the different faade


or wall systems that are relevant for the computation of ETTV;

Architectural plan layouts and elevations showing all the air-conditioning areas;

Extracts of the tender specification or material schedules showing the salient


data of the material properties that are to be used for the faade or external wall
system; and

ETTV calculation.

Code on Envelope Thermal Performance for Buildings issued by BCA


103

Worked
Example
1-1

Example 1
ETTV = 45 W/m2
Points scored = 1.2 x (50 ETTV)= 1.2 x (50 - 45) = 6 points
Example 2
ETTV = 35 W/m2
Points scored = 1.2 x (50 ETTV) = 1.2 x (50 35) = 18 points > 12 points
Therefore, points scored is 12 points (max)
Example 3
A proposed building development comprises three building blocks. The individual
ETTV of the each building computed are as follows :
ETTV bldg1 = 35 W/m2

Abldg = 5000 m2

ETTVbldg2 = 45 W/m2

Abldg = 6800 m2

ETTVbldg3 = 50 W/m2

Abldg = 7500 m2

Adevt = 5000+6800+7500

= 19300 m2

Therefore
ETTV

Weighted
average

= (ETTVbldg xAbldg) / Adevt


=

(ETTVbldg1 xAbldg1) + (ETTVbldg2 xAbldg2) + (ETTVbldg3 xAbldg3)


(Adevt)

(35 x 5000) + (45 x 6800) + (50 x 7500)


19300

44.35 W/m2

Points scored = 1.2 x (50 ETTV) = 1.2 x (50 44.35) = 6.78 points
Note : Refer to the Code on Envelope Thermal Performance for Buildings for more detailed
examples on how to compute the ETTV.

104

NRB 1-2 AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM


Objectives

Encourage the use of better energy efficient air-conditioned equipments and energy
management to minimise energy consumption.

Applicability

Applicable to air-conditioned building areas where its aggregate air-conditioned


areas > 500 m2.
Scope covers all air-conditioned equipments for the buildings as listed:

Baseline
Standard

Chillers
Chilled-Water Pumps
Condenser Water Pumps
Cooling Towers

Air Handling Units (AHUs)


Fan Coil Units (FCUs)
Direct-Expansion (DX) Unitary Air-Conditioners/
Condensing Units for single-split units, multi-spilt
units and variable refrigerant flow (VRF) system

1-2(a) Water Cooled Chilled-Water Plant


Peak Building Cooling Load

Baseline
Minimum Design System Efficiency (DSE)
for Central Chilled Water Plant

500 RT

< 500 RT

0.70 kW/RT

0.80 kW/RT

Chiller - Refer Table 2 of SS 530.


Chilled and condenser water pump efficiency - Refer to Clause 10.5.1.1 in
SS 553, which states that:
The pump power limitation for chilled water systems shall be 349 kW/m3/s.
The pump power limitation for condensing water systems shall be 301 kW/m3/s.

Cooling tower performance at the rating condition stated in Table 3 of SS530.


Rating condition is as follows : 35C Entering water
29C Leaving water
24C Wet bulb outdoor air
Propeller and axial fan cooling tower :
With heat rejected from every 3.23 L/s of condenser water per 1 kW of fan
power rating :
Cooling tower performance

1kW / 3.23 L/s


0.310 kW/ L/s

Centrifugal fan cooling tower :


With heat rejected from every 1.7 L/s of condenser water per 1 kW of fan
power rating :
Cooling tower performance

1kW/ 1.7 L/s


0.588 kW/ L/s

105

Baseline
Standard
Contd

1-2(b) Air Cooled Chilled-Water Plant/ Unitary Air-Conditioners


Peak Building Cooling Load

Baseline
Minimum Design System Efficiency (DSE)
for Air Cooled Chilled-Water Plant or
Unitary Air-Conditioners

500 RT

< 500 RT

0.80 kW/RT

0.90 kW/RT

For Air Cooled Chilled-Water Plant :


Chiller - Refer Table 2 of SS 530.
Chilled water pump efficiency - Refer to Clause 10.5.1.1 in SS 553, which states
that the pump power limitation for chilled water systems shall be 349 kW/m3/s.
For Unitary Air-Conditioners and Condensing Units:
Refer to the minimum efficiency requirement as stated in Table 1 of SS 530.
1-2(c) Air Distribution System
Option 1 Fan System Motor Nameplate Power
Baseline : SS553:2009 Table 2 Fan power limitation and as prescribed below :
Baseline

Allowable Motor Nameplate Power

Air Distribution System Type


Fan systems with motor
nameplate power 4kW

(kW/m3/s)

(W/CMH)

Air Handling Units (AHUs)


/Fan Coil Units (FCUs)
(Constant Volume)

1.7

0.47

Air Handling Units (AHUs)


/Fan Coil Units (FCUs)
(Variable Volume)

2.4

0.67

Fan systems with nameplate


motor power < 4 kW

No baseline

Option 2 Fan System Input Power


Baseline : ASHRAE 90.1 Clause 6.5.3.1 and as prescribed below :
Baseline

Allowable Fan System Input Power *

Air Distribution System Type


Fan systems with motor
nameplate power 4kW

(kW/m3/s)

(W/CMH)

Air Handling Units (AHUs)


/Fan Coil Units (FCUs)
(Constant Volume)

1.5

0.42

Air Handling Units (AHUs)


/Fan Coil Units (FCUs)
(Variable Volume)

2.1

0.58

Fan systems with motor


nameplate power < 4 kW

0.6

0.17

* Applicable pressure drop adjustments can be considered based on ASHRAE 90.1

Table 6.5.3.1.1B and are subject to BCAs evaluation

106

Requirements

(1) In general, chiller systems should be designed and rightly sized based on an
accurate peak building cooling load as well as the cooling load profile so as to meet
the operating load conditions with optimal efficiency. Various combinations of
chillers should be considered and designed to match the intended building cooling
load profile during operation for better energy performance.
(2) In deriving the peak building cooling loads, the conditions of a design day where
solar gains and temperatures are expected to be highest shall be used for
consistency. The relevant baseline standard for the building cooling system under
the criteria NRB 1-2 (a) and (b) will be based on the peak building cooling load
occurring on the specified simulated design day.
(3) Water Cooled Chilled-Water Plant
For the purpose of determining the point scoring for NRB 1-2(a), the
improvement in the water cooled chilled-water plant efficiency can be computed
based on the following simplified methodology.

Generate the simulated total building cooling load profile for a typical week
for the following building operating hours specified :
Office Buildings:
Monday to Friday : 9 a.m. to 6 p.m.

Hotels:
Monday to Sunday : 24 Hours

Retail Malls :
Monday to Sunday :10 a.m. to 9 p.m.

Other Building Types:


To be determined based on
operating hours

Design for optimal air-conditioning plant configuration that would ensure


that the chilled-water plants can operate within the best efficiency range
during the building operating hours specified.

Determine the power inputs of the various system components selected


over the operating range of cooling load conditions.

Derive the Design System Efficiency (DSE) of the proposed building


cooling system based total average cooling load and total power input for
point scoring.
Time

Average
Cooling
Load
(CL)

Chillers
Power Input

Chilled Water
Pumps
Power Input

Condensed
Water Pumps
Power Input

Cooling
Towers
Power Input

(RT)

(kW)

(kW)

(kW)

(kW)

(kW)

0900
1000
1100
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900

CL@0900
CL@1000
CL@1100
CL@1200
CL@1300
CL@1400
CL@1500
CL@1600
CL@1700
CL@1800
CL@1900

TPI@0900
TPI@1000
TPI@1100
TPI@1200
TPI@1300
TPI@1400
TPI@1500
TPI@1600
TPI@1700
TPI@1800
TPI@1900

TotalAverage
CoolingLoad
(09001800hrs)

CLi

Designtheairconditioningplant
configurationanddeterminethe
kWfromthevarioussystem
components

TotalPowerInputofairconditioningplant
(09001900hrs)

DesignSystemEfficiency(DSE)=TotalPowerInput=TPLi
TotalCoolingLoadCLi
107

Total Power
Input
(TPI)

TPLi

Requirements

Important notes :

Contd

The minimum frequency set-point for the Variable Speed Drives (VSDs) used for
regulating the speed of the chilled-water pumps, condenser water pumps or the cooling
tower fans and their limitation are to be considered to ensure that the chilled-water flow
can be effectively distributed.

Point scoring for 1-2 (a) Water Cooled Chilled-Water Plant (Up to 20 points)
Peak building cooling load 500 RT
15 points for meeting the prescribed Design System Efficiency of 0.70 kW/RT
(refer to the chilled-water plant efficiency)
0.25 point for every percentage improvement in the chilled-water plant efficency
over the baseline
Points scored = 0.25 x (% improvement)
Peak building cooling load < 500 RT
12 points for meeting the prescribed chilled-water plant efficiency of 0.80 kW/RT
0.45 point for every percentage improvement in the chilled-water plant efficiency
over the baseline
Points scored = 0.45 x (% improvement)
(4) Air-Cooled Chilled- Water Plant or Unitary Conditioners
For the purpose of determining the point scoring for NRB 1-2(b), the
improvement in the Design System Efficiency (DSE) of air-cooled chilled-water
plant or unitary conditioners can be computed based on the efficiency at full
installed capacity (excluding standby provision) or at the expected operating
part-load condition as outlined below.

Generate the simulated total building cooling load profile for a typical week
for the following building operating hours specified :
Office Buildings:
Monday to Friday : 9 a.m. to 6 p.m.

Hotels:
Monday to Sunday : 24 Hours

Retail Malls :
Monday to Sunday :10 a.m. to 9 p.m.

Other Building Types:


To be determined based on
operating hours

Method A - Compute the required capacities of the building cooling


systems based on full installed capacity for the different systems and
zones. Derive the Design System Efficiency (DSE) of the proposed
building cooling system based on total required cooling load and total
power input for point scoring.

Method B Determine the most frequently occurring operating part load


condition for the proposed building cooling system for all zones. Derive
the Design System Efficiency (DSE) of the proposed building cooling
system at the expected operating part load condition based on total
required cooling load and total power input for point scoring.

108

Requirements
Contd

Point Scoring for 1-2 (b)Air Cooled Chilled-Water Plant / Unitary Air Conditioners
( Up to 20 points)
Peak building cooling load 500 RT
12 points for meeting the prescribed Design System Efficiency of 0.80 kW/RT
(refers to efficiency of air-conditioning system such as air-cooled chilled-water
plant or unitary air-conditioners)
1.3 points for every percentage improvement in the air-conditioning system
efficiency over the baseline
Points awarded = 1.3 x (% improvement)
Peak building cooling load < 500 RT
10 points for meeting the prescribed Design System Efficiency of 0.90 kW/RT
0.6 point for every percentage improvement in the air-conditioning system
efficiency over the baseline
Points awarded = 0.6 x (% improvement)
Important notes :
(i) For variable refrigerant flow (VRF) system, the efficiency should be based on normal
design dry-bulb temperature of 24 1C and relative humidity RH 65%. The
improvement in the system efficiency can be computed based on the efficiency of full
installed capacity of outdoor condensing units or part-load efficiency of the system.
(ii) Where there are more than one most frequent occurring part-load conditions for the
building operation hours specified, the improvement in the building cooling system
efficiency and the point scored shall be based on the worst case scenario.

(5) Where there is a combination of central chilled water plants with unitary
conditioners, the points scored will only be based on the building cooling
system with a larger aggregate capacity.
(6) Air Distribution System
Point Scoring for 1-2 (c) Air Distribution System (Up to 6 points)
0.2 point for every percentage improvement in the air distribution system
efficiency above the baseline.
Points scored = 0.2 x (% improvement)
Important notes :
For buildings with cooling provision from a district cooling system (DCS) supplier that is
authorised by a licence to carry out all or any of the functions of providing district cooling
services to the services areas, the point scoring will be pro-rated based on the airdistribution system efficiency under NRB 1-2(c).

(7) Permanent Instrumentation Requirement


The permanent instrumentation shall comprise the temperature, flow and power
measurement system. Each measurement system shall include the sensor, any
signal conditioning (where applicable), the data acquisition system and the wiring
connecting them.

109

Requirements
Contd

Point Scoring for 1-2 (d) Instrumentation for Monitoring Central Water Cooled
Chilled-Water Plant Efficiency
1 point for the provision of permanent measuring instruments for monitoring
of water-cooled chilled-water plant efficiency. The installed instrumentation
shall have the capability to calculate the resultant chilled-water plant
efficiency within 5 % of the true value and in accordance with ASHRAE
Guide 22 and AHRI 550/590. The methodology for determining the total
uncertainty of measurement shall be computed using the root-sum square
formula as follows:
=

Errorrms

where UN =
N

( (UN)2)
individual uncertainty of variable N (%)
mass flow rate, electrical power input or delta T

In deriving the measurement errors contributed by flow meters, an additional


1% is to be included in the computation.
The following instrumentation and installation are also required to be complied
with :
(i) Location and installation of the measuring devices to meet the
manufacturers recommendation.
(ii) Data Acquisition system i.e. Analog-to-digital or A/D converter used shall
have a minimum resolution of 16 bit. For example,

The specification for the A/D converter of the BTU meter shall have a
minimum resolution of 16-bit. This applies to direct data acquisition from
the BTU meter.

For data acquisition using Building Management System (BMS), the


specification of the specific Digital Direct Controller (DDC) connecting
the temperature sensors shall have a minimum resolution of 16-bit.
(iii) All data logging with capability to trend at 1 minute sampling time interval.
(iv) Flow meters for chilled-water and condenser water loop shall be ultrasonic /
full bore magnetic type or equivalent.
(v) Temperature sensors are to be provided for chilled water and condenser
water loop and the measurement system shall have an end-to-end
uncertainty from the temperature sensors to the read out devices not
exceeding 0.05 C over the entire measurement or calibration range. All
thermo-wells shall be installed in a manner that ensures that the sensors
can be in direct contact with fluid flow. Provisions shall be made for each
temperature measurement location to have two spare thermo-wells located
at both side of the temperature sensor for verification of measurement
accuracy.
(vi) Dedicated digital power meters are to be provided for each of the following
groups of equipment: chillers, chilled water pumps, condenser water pumps
and cooling towers.

110

Requirements
Contd

(8) Heat Balance-Substantiating Test


Point scoring for 1-2 (e) Verification of central chilled-water plant instrumentation :
Heat balance substantiating test
1 point for completing the verification of chilled-water plant instrument using the
heat balance-substantiating test in accordance to AHRI 550/590. The heat
balance shall be conducted over the entire specific operating hours with more
than 80% of the computed heat balance within 5% over a one (1) week period.
For a perfectly balanced chiller system, the heat balance can be represented by
the following equation:
qcondenser = qevaporator + Winput
where qcondenser = heat rejected
qevaporator = cooling load
Winput
= power input to compressor
The pressure enthalpy diagram below shows the concept of heat balance
equation in a vapour compression cycle.

qcondenser

qevaporator

Winput

Pressure Enthalpy Diagram


The system heat balance of the chilled water plant shall be computed using the
following formula over the building operating hours as specified for the different
building categories.
Percent Heat Balance =

(qevaporator + Winput) - qcondenser


qcondenser

x 100% 5%

Note: For open drive chillers, the Winput shall take into account the motor efficiency
provided by the manufacturer. For example :
Input power (measured) = 100 kW
= 90%
Motor efficiency (m)
Adjusted Winput
= 100 kW x 90%
= 90 kW
In the event where hydraulic losses of pumps constitute substantial heat gain,
these losses should be accounted for as illustrated in the following examples. Note
that the motor and pump efficiency values used in the computation should be
based on the manufacturers specification.

111

Requirements
Contd

(a) For chilled water pump(s) adjustment


Motor input power (measured) = 30 kW
(A)
Motor efficiency (m)
= 90%
(B)
Pump efficiency (p)
= 80%
(C)
Hydraulic losses
= (A) x (B) x [(100% (C)]
= 30 kW x 90% x (100% - 80%)
= 5.4 kW
Adjusted Winput
= kWi (chillers) + 5.4 kW
where kWi (chillers) = adjusted power input to compressor, kW
(b) For condenser water pump(s) adjustment
Motor input power (measured) = 20 kW
(A)
Motor efficiency (m)
= 90%
(B)
Pump efficiency (p)
= 80%
(C)
Hydraulic losses
= (A) x (B) x [(100% (C)]
= 20 kW x 90% x (100% - 80%)
= 3.6 kW
Adjusted qcondenser
= qcondenser - 3.6 kW
(9) Control Devices
Point scoring for 1-2 (f) Variable speed control devices for chiller plant equipment
(1 point)
1 point can be scored if there are provisions of variable speed controls for chilled
water pumps and cooling tower fans to ensure better part-load efficiency of the
plant.
Point scoring for 1-2 (g) Sensors or similar automatic control devices (1 point)
1 point can be scored if sensors or similar automatic control devices are used to
regulate outdoor air flow rate to maintain the concentration of carbon dioxide
(CO2) in accordance with Table 1 Recommended IAQ Parameters of SS 554.
Carbon dioxide acceptable range: 700 ppm above outdoor.

Prerequisites

(A) Minimum Design System Efficiency (DSE) of building cooling system to be as


follows:
Building Cooling System Type

Peak Building Cooling Load (RT)


< 500
500
Minimum Design System
Efficiency (kW/RT)

Water Cooled Chilled-Water Plant

0.80

0.70

Air Cooled Chilled-Water Plant or


Unitary Air-Conditioners

0.90

0.80

(B) Instrumentation for monitoring the water cooled chilled-water plant efficiency
is to be provided in accordance with the requirement set in the criteria.

112

Documentary
Evidences

For 1-2(a) and 1-2(b)


Detailed calculations of the Design System Efficiency (DSE) of the air-

conditioning system that include the cooling load profile in the prescribed
formats as shown in the worked examples 1-2(a) & 1-2(b);
Drawings showing the schematic and layout of the proposed building cooling

system;
Plan layouts showing the mode of ventilation for various floor and blocks as

well as the location of the plant room and cooling towers;


Air-conditioning system information in prescribed format;

Pump Head Calculation; and


Technical specification and performance data of the various components of the

building cooling system designed and installed.


For 1-2(c)
Detailed calculations of the overall improvement in equipment efficiency of the

air distribution system in the prescribed tabulated formats as shown in the


worked examples 1-2(c); and
Technical specification and product information of the air-distribution system

designed and installed.


For 1-2(d)

Calculation of the overall uncertainty of measurement of the resultant chiller


plant efficiency in kW/RT to be within 5 % of the true value as illustrated in
the worked example 1-2(d);

Instruments calibration certificates from accredited laboratory and factory


calibration certificates from manufacturers;

Chiller plant room plan layouts showing the details of the instruments
locations;

Plan layouts showing the locations and the types of instrumentation used;

Summary of instruments, standards and measurement accuracy to be


presented in the following format and example :

End-to End

113

Documentary
Evidences
Contd

For 1-2(d) Contd


Technical specification and product information of the flow meter proposed and
installed;
Technical specification and product information of the temperature sensors
proposed and installed; and
Technical specification and product information of the power meter proposed
and installed.

For 1-2(e)

Heat balance substantiating test result verifying the central chilled-water


plants instrumentation and in the prescribed format shown in the worked
example 1-2(e).
For 1-2 (f)
Technical specifications of control devices and a write up or schematic

drawings on how these devices are to be used and installed; and


Plan layouts showing the locations of variable speed control devices for the

chiller plant equipment i.e. chilled water pump and cooling tower fans or
schematic print-out from BMS.
For 1-2(g)
Technical specifications of the control devices and a write up or schematic
drawings on how these devices are used and installed; and
Plan layouts showing the locations and the types of control devices used to
regulate fresh air intake or schematic print-out from BMS.

References

SS 530 Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency Standard for Building Services and
Equipment.
SS 553 Code of Practice for Air-Conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation in
Buildings.
SS 554 - Code of Practice for Indoor Air Quality for Air-Conditioned Buildings
ASHRAE Guideline 22 Instrumentation for Monitoring Central Chilled-Water Plant
Efficiency
AHRI Standard 550/590 Performance Rating of Water- Chilling Packages Using
The Vapor Compression Cycle

114

Worked
Example
1-2(a)
For Water
Cooled
Chilled-Water
Plant

Computation
of the Design
System
Efficiency
(DSE)

Calculation of System Efficiency of Water Cooled Central Chilled-Water Plant


- Primary Variable Chilled-Water System
Background info

Office building air-conditioned floor area = 67,500 m2

Variable-speed drives are designed to control the speed of the chilled-water


pumps and cooling tower fans

Building operating hours for office buildings as specified:


Monday to Friday : 9 a.m. to 6 p.m.

Step 1 Determine the peak building cooling load and relevant baseline
Simulation analysis of the building cooling load profile based on design day to be
carried out to determine the peak building cooling load and the relevant baseline
standard.

Peak Building Cooling


Load = 1350 RT

From 9 a.m. to 6 p.m.

From the simulated building cooling load profile, the peak building cooling load is
1,350 RT (> 500 RT) and the minimum Design System Efficiency for water cooled
chilled water plant is 0.70 kW/RT.
Step 2 Generate the simulated total building cooling load profile based on a
typical week for the building operating hours specified.
Time

Average Cooling Load (RT)

8:00

1150

9:00

1190

10:00

1260

11:00

1260

12:00

1260

13:00

1260

14:00

1260

15:00

1260

16:00

1190

17:00

1190

18:00

1190

19:00

980
115

Worked
Example
1-2(a)
Contd
For Water
Cooled
Chilled-Water
Plant

Computation
of the Design
System
Efficiency
(DSE)

Step 3 Propose air-conditioning plant configuration and derive the respective


power input of various components
Proposed air-conditioning plant configuration for the building operating hours
specified to be as follows :
Chillers

3 nos. x 700 RT (2 in operation and 1 stand by)

Chilled Water Pumps

3 nos. x 45 kW (2 in operation and 1 stand-by)

Condenser Water Pumps

3 nos. x 55 kW (2 in operation and 1 stand-by)

Cooling Towers

3 nos. x 900 RT (2 in operation and 1 stand-by)

Important notes :
(1) It is important to design the air-conditioning plant configuration for other load conditions
that are not within the building operating hours specified, although this is not required
for point scoring purpose.
(2) The estimated operating pump and motor power of the various components at part-load
condition as illustrated in Step 3 are based on the affinity laws assuming that the
system curve remains unchanged.

3(a) Centrifugal water-cooled chiller (700 RT)


Based on the performance data of the selected chillers from manufacturer :
%
Load

Capacity
(RT)

Chiller
Input
Power
(kW)

Chiller
Efficiency
kW/RT

CHWS
T (C)

CHWR
T (C)

CWST
(C)

CWRT
(C)

100

700

363

0.519

6.67

12.31

29.68

34.80

90

630

329

0.522

6.67

12.31

29.68

34.29

80

560

291

0.520

6.67

12.31

29.68

33.78

70

490

260

0.533

6.67

12.31

29.68

33.28

Evaporator

Condenser

Installed capacity of the chillers (excluding standby) = 1,400 RT


Chillers configuration: 2 x 700 RT centrifugal chillers (operating);
1 x 700 RT centrifugal chiller (standby)
Based on simulated total building load profile, we have
Time

Cooling Load
(RT)

No. of Chillers in
Operation

Chiller
Efficiency

Chiller Input
Power (kW)

From 0900 to 1000


& 1500 to 1800

1190 RT

2x700RT @ 85%

0.521

620

From 1000 to 1500

1260 RT

2x700RT @ 90%

0.522

658

3(b) Chilled-water pumps (primary only):


(i) 2 nos.x 45 kW primary chilled-water pump to be installed with Variable
Speed Drive (VSD)
(ii) Water flow rate per pump at full load (Q) = 106 L/s
(iii) Operating static head (h)= 28 m
(iv) Pump efficiency (p) = 86.8 %
(v) Motor efficiency (m) = 94.2 %
116

Worked
Example
1-2(a)
Contd

Power requirement of chilled-water pump at full load (kW) =


where

Q =water flow rate in L/s


=density of water in kg/m3
g =gravitational acceleration in m/s2
h =static pressure head m
p =pump efficiency
m=motor efficiency

For Water
Cooled
Chilled-Water
Plant

Computation
of the Design
System
Efficiency
(DSE)

(Q )( )( g )(h)
(10 6 )( p )( m )

(106)(1000)(9.81)(28)
(106)(0.868)(0.942)

Power requirement of chilled-water pump (kW) =

= 35.61 kW
For part-load operating condition,
3

Pump Power@ 85%


Pump Power@ 100%

Pump Speed@ 85%


Pump Speed@ 100%

Pump power at 85% part-load (kW) = 35.61 x (0.85)3 = 21.87kW


Total operating pump power (kW) = 21.87 kW x 2
= 43.74 kW
Similarly,
Pump power at 90% part-load (kW) = 35.61 x (0.9)3 = 25.96 kW
Total operating pump power (kW) = 25.96 kW x 2
= 51.92 kW
Cooling Load (RT)

No. of Chilled-Water
Pumps in operation

Total Operating
Pump Power (kW)*

1190 RT

2 x 45 kW @ 85%

43.74

1260 RT

2 x 45 kW @ 90%

51.92

* Note that the change in the system curve as well as VSD losses (if substantial) should be considered.

3(c) Condenser water pumps :


(i) 2 nos.x 55 kW condenser water pumps to be installed with VSD
(ii) Water flow rate for the condenser water pump (Q) = 132.5 L/s
(iii) Operating static head (h) = 32m
(iv) Pump efficiency (p)= 88.5%
(v) Motor efficiency (m) = 94.7%
Power requirement of condenser water pump at full load (kW)
=

(132.5)(1000)(9.81)(32)
(106)(0.885)(0.947)

117

= 49.63 kW

Worked
Example
1-2(a)
Contd
For Water
Cooled
Chilled-Water
Plant

Computation
of the Design
System
Efficiency
(DSE)

For part-load operating condition,


3

Pump Power@ 85%


Pump Power@ 100%

Pump Speed@ 85%


Pump Speed@ 100%

Pump power at 85% part-load (kW) = 49.63 x (0.85)3 = 30.48 kW


Total operating pump power (kW) = 30.48 kW x 2
= 60.96 kW
Similarly,
Pump power at 90% part-load (kW) = 49.63 x (0.9)3 = 36.18 kW
Total operating pump power (kW) = 36.18 kW x 2 = 72.36 kW
Cooling Load
(RT)

No. of Condenser Water


Pumps in operation

Total Operating
Pump Power (kW)*

1190 RT

2 x 55 kW @ 85%

60.96

1260 RT

2 x 55 kW @ 90%

72.36

* Note that the reduced condenser water flow rate at part load condition and the VSD losses (if substantial)
should be considered.

3(d) Cooling towers :


(i)

2 nos. of cooling towers to be installed with VSD

(ii) Heat rejection capacity per cooling tower = 900 RT


(iii) Total heat rejection for 2 x cooling towers = 1800 RT
(iv) Each cooling tower with 3 fan cells with fan motor = 7.5 kW
(v) Fan motor efficiency = 92%
(vi) Input power per cooling tower = (7.5 kW x 3 fans) x 92% = 24.4 kW
(vii) Total input power for 2 nos. of cooling towers = 24.46 kW x 2 = 48.92 kW
In general,
Total heat rejection of
chiller plant (kW)

= Total Cooling load (kW) + Total electrical power


input to chiller compressor (kW)
3

Fan Power@ part load%


Fan Power@ 100%

Cooling
Load

Chiller
Input
Power

Required
Heat
Rejection

(a)

(b)

(c) = (a) + (b)

(RT)

(kW)

1190 RT
1260 RT

Fan Speed@ part load%


Fan Speed@ 100%
Total Heat
Rejection
capacity for
2 nos of
Cooling
Towers

Percentage
Loading for
Required and
Available
Heat
Rejection

Total Fan
Motor
Power at
required
part-load
condition*

(RT)

(RT)

(kW)

620

1366.28

1800

75.9%

21.39

658

1447.08

1800

80.4%

25.43

* Note that the same corresponding effect of higher condenser water supply temperature arising due to the
reduced cooling tower fan speed should be considered
118

Worked
Example
1-2(a)
Contd
For Water
Cooled
Chilled-Water
Plant

Computation
of the Design
System
Efficiency
(DSE)

Step 4 Derive the Design System Efficiency (DSE)


Time

Average
Cooling
Load

Chillers
Power
Input

CHW
Pumps
Power

CW
Pumps
Power

CT
power

Total
Power
Input

(RT)

(kW)

(kW)

(kW)

(kW)

(kW)

9:00

1190

620

43.74

60.96

21.39

746.09

10:00

1260

658

51.92

72.36

25.43

807.71

11:00

1260

51.92

72.36

25.43

807.71

12:00

1260

658
658

51.92

72.36

25.43

807.71

13:00

1260

658

51.92

72.36

25.43

807.71

14:00

1260

658

51.92

72.36

25.43

807.71

15:00

1260

658

51.92

72.36

25.43

807.71

16:00

1190

620

43.74

60.96

21.39

746.09

17:00

1190

620

43.74

60.96

21.39

746.09

18:00

1190

620

43.74

60.96

21.39

746.09

Total
(0900 to 1800)

CLi =

6428

486.48

678

238.14

0.522

0.039

0.055

0.019

12320

Efficiency kW/RT

TPLi =
7830.62
0.64

Design Efficiency of the various components of the


proposed building cooling system
Design System Efficiency (DSE) of the proposed
building cooling system

Total Power Input/Total Cooling Load


= TPLi

< 0.70 kW/RT Ok

CLi
15 points for meeting the prescribed Design System Efficiency of 0.70 kW/RT
0.25 point for every percentage improvement in the chilled-water plant efficiency
over the baseline
Therefore, points scored = 15 + 0.25 x (% improvement)
= 15 + 0.25 x [(0.70 0.64)/0.70 x100%]
= 15 + 0.25 (8.57) = 17.14 points

119

Worked
Example
1-2(b)
For VRF
System

Calculation of System Efficiency for Unitary Air-Conditioners/ Condensing


Units - VRF System
Background info

Air-conditioned areas = 4250 m2

Building operation hours are defined as:


Monday to Friday : 9 a.m. to 6 p.m.

Step1 Determine the peak building cooling load and relevant baseline
Simulation analysis of the building cooling load profile based on design day to be
carried out to determine the peak building cooling load and the relevant baseline
standard.
Peak building cooling load
= 105 RT

From the simulated building cooling load profile, the peak building cooling load
is 105 RT (< 500 RT) and therefore the minimum Design System Efficiency for VRF
system is 0.90 kW/RT.
The proposed Design System Efficiency of the VRF system and the improvement
can be computed based on the efficiency at full load condition that is full installed
capacity (excluding standby provision) or expected operating part-load condition.
The following will illustrate these two simplified approaches in determining the point
scoring based on the full load condition (as detailed in Method A) and expected
operating part-load condition (as detailed in Method B) for clarity.

120

Worked
Example
1-2(b)
Contd

Method (A) : Computation of the Design System Efficiency (DSE) based on


full installed capacity
Step A-1 - Determine the required capacities of the VRF systems at full-load
condition - Proposed VRF System Schedule
Specification of VRF Outdoor Condensing Unit

For VRF
System
System

Computation
of Design
System
Efficiency
(DSE)
based on
full load
condition

Floor

FCC Room

Lift Lobby
+ Internal
Corridor

Reception

Floor

Location
Served

System

Location
Served

Total Cooling
Capacity (kW)

Power Input
(kW)

COP

Full Installed
Capacity

Full Installed
Capacity

Full Installed
Capacity

22.4

5.24

4.2

Full Installed
Capacity

Full Installed
Capacity

Full Installed
Capacity

44.8

10.5

4.29

Office
Office
Office
2 to 9

2 to 9

Office
Office
Lift lobby
Lobby 2

Note : Typical VRF Systems are designed for Floor 2 to 9

Step A-2 - Determine the Design System Efficiency (DSE) of the VRF system at full
load condition
Full load efficiency :
System

Floor

Total Power Input


(kW) @ Full Load

Total Required Cooling


(kW) @ Full Load

Total Required
Cooling (RT)

5.24

22.4

6.37

2 to 9

2 to 9

84.0

358.4

102.0

89.24

380.8

108.37

Total:

Design System Efficiency (DSE) for the VRF system = 89.24/108.37


at full load condition
= 0.82 kW/RT
10 points for meeting the prescribed DSE of 0.90 kW/RT
0.6 point for every percentage improvement in the VRF system efficiency over the
baseline
121

Therefore, points scored = 10 + 0.6 x (% improvement)


= 10 + 0.6 [(0.90 0.82)/0.90x 100%]
= 10 + 0.6 (8.89) = 15.33 points
Worked
Example
1-2(b)
Contd

For VRF
System

Method (B) : Computation of the Design System Efficiency (DSE) based on


the expected operating part load condition
Step B-1 Determine the most frequent occurring operating part load condition of the
installed outdoor condensing unit capacity for all zones
(Most frequent occurring operating part-load conditions can be determined by the operating load points
that form a horizontal straight line; the points can either fall on the line or very close to the line)

B-1(a) Zone 1 design day cooling load profile:


Computation
of Design
System
Efficiency
(DSE)
based on
expected
operating
part - load
condition

Time

Cooling Load (kW)

0:00 7.00

8:00

18.5

9:00

21.5

10:00

14.2

11:00

14.1

12:00

17.6

13:00

15.5

14:00

14.1

15:00

13.6

16:00

13.4

17:00

13.7

18:00

14.3

19:00

17.9

20:0023:00

Based on the simulated building cooling load profile for the building operation hours
from 8:00 to 19:00, the estimated most frequent occurring part-load condition of
the installed capacity is 60% i.e. 13.4 kW for Zone 1

122

Worked
Example
1-2(b)
Contd

B-1 (b) Zone 2 to 10 design day cooling load profile.

For VRF
System

Computation
of Design
System
Efficiency
(DSE)
based on
expected
operating
part - load
condition

.
Based on the simulated building cooling load profile for the building operation
hours from 8:00 to 19:00, the estimated most frequent occurring part-load
condition of the installed capacity is 70%
i.e. 31.4 kW for Zone 2 to 10
Time

Cooling Load (kW)

0:00 7:00

8:00

33.5

9:00

32.9

10:00

31.0

11:00

31.3

12:00

26.5

13:00

31.1

14:00

32.4

15:00

39.0

16:00

31.5

17:00

30.5

18:00

30.2

19:00

25.9

20:0023:00

123

Worked
Example
1-2(b)
Contd

Step B-2 Proposed VRF System Schedule


Specification of VRF Outdoor Condensing Unit

System

Floor

Location
Served

For VRF
System

Computation
of Design
System
Efficiency
(DSE)
based on
expected
operating
part - load
condition

System

FCC
Room

Lift Lobby
+ Internal
Corridor

Reception

Floor

Location
Served

Total Cooling
Capacity (kW)

Power Input (kW)

COP

KW/RT

Full
Installed
Capacity

60%
Part
load

Full
Installed
Capacity

60%
Part
load

Full
Installed
Capacity

60%
Part
load

60%
Part
load

22.4

13.4

5.24

2.55

4.2

5.25

0.67

Full
Installed
Capacity

70%
Part
Load

Full
Installed
Capacity

70%
Part
Load

Full
Installed
Capacity

70%
Part
Load

70%
Part
Load

44.8

31.4

10.5

6.28

4.29

5.02

0.70

Office
Office
Office
2 to 10

2 to 9

Office
Office
Lift
Lobby
Lobby 2

Step B-3 Determine the Design System Efficiency (DSE) of the VRF systems at the
expected operating part-load condition
The Design System Efficiency (DSE) of VRF systems serving the building is:
System

Floor

Total Power Input


(kW)

Total Required
Cooling (kW)

Total Required
Cooling (RT)

2.55

13.4

3.81

2 to 10

2 to 9

50.24

251.2

71.42

Total:

52.79

Design System Efficiency (DSE) for the VRF system

75.23

= 52.79 / 75.23
= 0.70 kW/RT

10 points for meeting the prescribed Design System Efficiency of 0.90 kW/RT
0.6 points for every percentage improvement in the air-conditioning system
efficiency over the baseline
Points scored = 10 + 0.6 x (% improvement)
= 10 + 0.6 [(0.90 0.70)/0.90x 100%] = 23.33 points > 20 points
Therefore, points scored is 20 points (max)

124

Worked
Example
1-2(c)

Calculation of Efficiency for Air Distribution Equipment


Based on Option 1 Fan System Motor Nameplate Power

Computation
of equipment
efficiency of
air distribution
system

Background info
Based on contract or suppliers specification and design, we have
1. AHUs (VAV system):
a. Total fan power consumption = 264.5 kW = 264500 W
b. Total air volume flow rate = 409212 CMH
Equipment efficiency = 264500/409212 = 0.645 W/CMH
2. AHUs (CAV system):
a. Total fan power consumption = 275.5 kW = 275500 W
b. Total air volume flow rate = 678520 CMH
Equipment efficiency = 275500/678520 = 0.406 W/CMH

Option 1 :
Fan System
Motor
Nameplate
Power

3. FCUs having motor nameplate power not exceeding 4kW


(Note that there is no baseline for this category)

a. Total fan power consumption = 11.00 kW = 11000 W


b. Total air volume flow rate = 74233 CMH
Equipment efficiency = 11000/74233 = 0.148 W/CMH
4. Overall required air distribution system efficiency
=

(0.67)(409212)+(0.47)(678520)+(0.15)(74233)
(409212+678520+74233)

= 0.52 W/CMH
5. Overall required air distribution system efficiency based on suppliers
specs/contract specs
= (264500+275500+11000)/(409212+678520+74233)
= 0.474 W/CMH
Table 1-2(c)(i) : Equipment Efficiency based on Option 1 (Air-Distribution System)
From Specs
Allowable Motor
Nameplate Power
SS 553 (W/CMH)

Motor
Nameplate
Power at design
condition
(W/CMH)

Equipment Type

Total air
flow
(CMH)

Nameplate
motor
power (W)

1. AHUs (VAV)
2. AHUs (CAV)
3. FCUs (<4 kW)

409212
678520
74233

264500
275500
11000

0.670
0.470
0.150

0.645
0.406
0.148

1161965

551000

0.520

0.474

Total

See working (4) above

% Improvement in Efficiency for Air Distribution Equipment

See working (5) above

=
=

Points scored = 0.2 x (% improvement) = 0.2 x (8.85) = 1.77 points

125

0.520 0.474 x 100%


0.520

8.85%

Worked
Example
1-2(c)
Contd

Computation
of equipment
efficiency of
air distribution
system

Option 2 :
Fan System
Input Power

Calculation of Efficiency for Air Distribution Equipment


Based on Option 2 Fan System Input Power
Background info
Based on contract or suppliers specification and design, we have
1. AHUs (VAV system):
a. Total fan input power consumption = 221.58 kW = 221580 W
b. Total air volume flow rate = 409212 CMH
Equipment efficiency = 221580/409212 = 0.542 W/CMH
2. AHUs (CAV system):
a. Total fan input power consumption = 248.50 kW = 248500 W
b. Total air volume flow rate = 678520 CMH
Equipment efficiency = 248500/678520 = 0.366 W/CMH
3. FCUs having motor nameplate power not exceeding 4kW
(Baseline of 0.17 W/CMH can be used for Option 2)

a. Total fan input power consumption = 10.26 kW = 10260 W


b. Total air volume flow rate = 74233 CMH
Equipment efficiency = 10260/74233 = 0.138 W/CMH
4. Overall required air distribution system efficiency
=

(0.58)(409212)+(0.42)(678520)+(0.17)(74233)
(409212+678520+74233)

= 0.460 W/CMH
5. Overall required air distribution system efficiency based on suppliers
specs/contract specs
= (221580+248500+10260)/(409212+678520+74233)
= 0.413 W/CMH

Table 1-2(c)(ii): Equipment Efficiency based on Option 2 (Air-Distribution System)


From Specs
Equipment Type

Total air
flow
(CMH)

Total motor
power
rating (W)

Power Required
by the motor in
accordance with
the baseline set
(W/CMH)

1. AHUs (VAV)
2. AHUs (CAV)
3. FCUs (<4 kW)

409212
678520
74233

221580
248500
10260

0.580
0.420
0.170

0.542
0.366
0.138

1161965

480340

0.460

0.413

Total

See working (4) above

% Improvement in Efficiency for Air Distribution Equipment

Points scored = 0.2 x (% improvement) = 0.2 x (10) = 2 points

126

Power Required
by the motor at
design
condition
(W/CMH)

See working (5) above

0.46 0.413 x 100%


0.460

~10%

Worked
Example
1-2(d)

Computation
of overall
uncertainty of
measurement

As instrumentation measurement uncertainties stated in calibration certificates and


technical specifications are based on controlled conditions in a laboratory, it is
necessary to allow for on-site deviations and measurements. The overall
measurement system comprising the temperature, flow and power measurement
shall be capable of calculating resultant chiller-water plant efficiency with the
uncertainty within 5% for on-site measurement. Each measurement shall include
the sensor, any signal conditioning (if available), the data acquisition system and
the wiring connecting them. The following example illustrates the computation of
the uncertainty of the overall measurement system installed.
Item

Measurement System

End-to-End
Measurement Uncertainty
(% of reading)

Temperature

Flow

1% see note (2) + 1% (i.e. 2%)

Power

1% see note (3)

0.052 0.052
1.3 %see note (1)
5. 5

Note:
(1) Temperature measurement system shall have an end-to-end measurement
uncertainty of 0.05C over the entire measurement range. The combined
uncertainty for T is computed based on the root-sum square formula with T
assumed to be 5.5 C as illustrated above.
(2) An additional 1% to be included in the computation of measurement errors for
flow meter.
(3) Uncertainty of power measurement system shall include that of the current
transformer where applicable.
The overall uncertainty of the measurement system shall be the combination of the
individual uncertainty of each measurement system. Based on the above
information, the overall uncertainty of measurement is as shown in the following :
Errorrms

( (UN)2)

(1.32 +22 + 12)

2.6 %

where UN = individual uncertainty of


variable N (%)
N = mass flow rate, electrical
power input or delta T

Therefore, the total uncertainty for the calculated chilled-water plant efficiency
(kW/RT) is 2.6 %, which falls within the 5% of the true value.

127

Worked
Example
1-2(e)

Determining Heat Balance for Different Plant Configuration


Plant A Constant Primary Chilled-Water System
AHU

Determining
Heat Balance
for Different
Plant
Configuration

CHWS
(C)

BPV

For Constant
Primary
Chilled Water
System

FM 1 (L/s)
CHWR
(C)

CHWP

Chiller

kWi-1
CWP
CHWP

Chiller

kWi-2
CWP

CHWP

Chiller

kWi-3
CWP

CWR
(C)

FM 2 (L/s)
Cooling
Tower

CWS
(C)

Cooling
Tower
Cooling
Tower

A: qevaporator
B: qcondenser
C: Winput

= m x Cp x T = FM1 x Cp x (CHWR - CHWS)


= m x Cp x T = FM2 x Cp x (CWR - CWS)
= kWi-1 + kWi-2 + kWi-3

where Cp = 4.19 kJ/kg.C and density of water is assumed to be 1kg/L


Percent heat balance = [(A + C) B] / B x 100%
Note : In the event where hydraulic losses of pumps constitute substantial heat gain,
the Winput and qcondenser should be adjusted to account for the additional heat gains.
The value shall be determined from certified drive losses, motor efficiency and pump
efficiency values provided by the manufacturer.

128

Worked
Example
1-2(e)

Determining Heat Balance for Different Plant Configuration


Plant B Variable Primary Chilled-Water System

Determining
Heat Balance
for Different
Plant
Configuration

AHU

CHWS
(C)
BPV

For Variable
Primary
Chilled Water
System

FM1
CHWR1
(C)

CHWR2
(C)

(L/s)

kWi-1

CHWP

CWP

kWi-2

CHWP

CWP

kWi-3

CHWP

CWP

CWR
(C)

CWS
(C)

FM2 (L/s)
Cooling
Tower

A: qevaporator
B: qcondenser
C: Winput

Cooling
Tower

Cooling
Tower

= FM1 x Cp x (CHWR2 - CHWS)


= FM2 x Cp x (CWR - CWS)
= kWi-1 + kWi-2 + kWi-3

where Cp = 4.19 kJ/kg.C and density of water is assumed to be 1kg/L


Percent heat balance = [(A + C) B] / B x 100%
Note : In the event where hydraulic losses of pumps constitute substantial heat gain,
the Winput and qcondenser should be adjusted to account for the additional heat gains.
The value shall be determined from certified drive losses, motor efficiency and pump
efficiency values provided by the manufacturer.

129

Worked
Example
1-2(e)

Determining Heat Balance for Different Plant Configuration


Plant C Constant Primary & Variable Secondary Chilled-Water System

Determining
Heat Balance
for Different
Plant
Configuration

AHU

For Constant
Primary &
Variable
Secondary
Chilled Water
System

CHWS1
(C)
HYDRONIC DE-COUPLER
FM1

(L/s)
CHWR
(C)

CHWP

Chiller

kWi-1
CHWS2
(C)

CHWP
CWP

CHWP

Chiller

kWi-2

CHWP
CWP

CHWP
CHWP

Chiller

kWi-3
CWP

CWS
(C)

CWR
(C)

FM3
Cooling
Tower

A: qevaporator
B: qcondenser
C: Winput

Cooling
Tower

(L/s)

Cooling
Tower

= FM1 x Cp x (CHWR CHWS1)


= FM3 x Cp x (CWR - CWS)
= kWi-1 + kWi-2 + kWi-3

where Cp = 4.19 kJ/kg.C and density of water is assumed to be 1kg/L


Percent heat balance = [(A + C) B] / B x 100%
Note : In the event where hydraulic losses of pumps constitute substantial heat gain,
the Winput and qcondenser should be adjusted to account for the additional heat gains.
The value of which shall be determined from certified drive losses, motor efficiency and
pump efficiency values provided by the manufacturer.

130

Worked
Example
1-2(e)

Determining Heat Balance for Different Plant Configuration


Plant D Series Counter Flow Chilled-Water System

Determining
Heat Balance
for Different
Plant
Configuration

AHU

CHWS
(C)

BPV

FM1

For Series
Counter Flow
Chilled Water
System

(L/s)

CHWR1
(C)

CHWP

CHWP
Chiller

kWi-2

Chiller

kWi-1

CHWR2
(C)

kWi-4

kWi-3

Chiller

Chiller

CWP

CWS
(C)

CWP
Cooling
Tower

Cooling
Tower

Cooling
Tower

Cooling
Tower

CWS
(C)
FM2
(L/s)

A: qevaporator
B: qcondenser
C: Winput

= FM1 x Cp x (CHWR2 - CHWS)


= FM2 x Cp x (CWR - CWS)
= kWi-1 + kWi-2 + kWi-3 + kWi-4

where Cp = 4.19 kJ/kg.C and density of water is assumed to be 1kg/L


Percent heat balance = [(A + C) B] / B x 100%
Note : In the event where hydraulic losses of pumps constitute substantial heat gain,
the Winput and qcondenser should be adjusted to account for the additional heat gains.
The value shall be determined from certified drive losses, motor efficiency and pump
efficiency values provided by the manufacturer.

131

C
12.60
12.50
12.30
12.10
12.20
12.00
12.30
12.10
12.10
12.20
12.40
12.60
12.50
12.30
12.10
12.20
12.00
12.30
12.10
12.10
12.20
12.40

L/s
84.10
84.20
84.30
84.20
84.10
84.00
84.10
84.20
84.30
84.20
84.10
84.10
84.20
84.30
84.20
84.10
84.00
84.10
84.20
84.30
84.20
84.10

C
29.4
29.5
29.6
29.7
29.8
29.9
29.8
29.7
29.6
29.5
29.4
29.4
29.5
29.6
29.7
29.8
29.9
29.8
29.7
29.6
29.5
29.4

C
35.5
35.4
35.3
35.2
35.1
35
35.1
35.2
35.3
35.4
35.2
35.5
35.4
35.3
35.2
35.1
35
35.1
35.2
35.3
35.4
35.2

L/s
97.65
97.60
97.55
97.50
97.55
97.60
97.65
97.60
97.55
97.50
97.55
97.65
97.60
97.55
97.50
97.55
97.60
97.65
97.60
97.55
97.50
97.55

kW
308
309
310
311
312
311
310
309
308
309
310
308
309
310
311
312
311
310
309
308
309
310
6814

(h)

(i)

RT
RT
591.14
709.65
580.81
686.03
560.41
662.44
538.68
638.86
547.05
615.95
525.39
593.01
557.07
616.58
538.68
639.52
540.32
662.44
550.71
685.33
571.10
674.06
591.14
709.65
580.81
686.03
560.41
662.44
538.68
638.86
547.05
615.95
525.39
593.01
557.07
616.58
538.68
639.52
540.32
662.44
550.71
685.33
571.10
674.06
12,202.71 14,367.72
Totaldatacount

%
4.36
2.53
2.10
1.84
3.22
3.51
4.64
2.03
5.21
6.82
2.20
4.36
2.53
2.10
1.84
3.22
3.51
4.64
2.03
5.21
6.82
2.20
32.36
22

DataCount>+5%error

DataCount<5%error

Percentageofheatbalancewithin5%

Heat Gain (h)

(j)
PercentHeatBalance

C
6.70
6.71
6.72
6.73
6.74
6.75
6.74
6.73
6.72
6.71
6.70
6.70
6.71
6.72
6.73
6.74
6.75
6.74
6.73
6.72
6.71
6.70

(g)

HeatRejected

(f)
Condenserwaterflow
rate

(b)

HeatGain

(e)
Condenserwaterreturn
temperature

(a)

ChillerkWe

(d)
Condenserwater
supplytemperature

dd/mm/yyyyhh:mm
16/6/201215:00
16/6/201215:01
16/6/201215:02
16/6/201215:03
16/6/201215:04
16/6/201215:05
16/6/201215:06
16/6/201215:07
16/6/201215:08
16/6/201215:09
16/6/201215:10
16/6/201215:11
16/6/201215:12
16/6/201215:13
16/6/201215:14
16/6/201215:15
16/6/201215:16
16/6/201215:17
16/6/201215:18
16/6/201215:19
16/6/201215:20
16/6/201215:21
Total

(c)
Chilledwaterflowrate

Heat Balance
Calculation

Chilledwaterreturn
temperature

The example illustrates the computation required in deriving the percent heat
balance based the available data collated.

Chilledwatersupply
temperature

Worked
Example
1-2(e)

82%

= m x Cp x T = (c) x 4.19kJ/kg oC x [(b) (a)] / 3.517

Heat Rejected (i) = (f) x 4.19 kJ/kg oC x [(e) (d)] / 3.517


Percent Heat Balance (j) = 100 x [(g) / 3.517 + (h) (i)] / (i)

132

Worked
Example
1-2(e)
Contd

System level heat balance plot

Heat Balance
Calculation

5%

Summary of Heat Balance


Quantity

Unit

Sum of total electrical energy


used

6814

kWh

(A)

Sum of total cooling produced

12,202

RTh

(B)

Sum of total heat rejected

14,367

RTh

(C)

0.56

kW/RT

Total Heat Balance Data Count

22

(D)

Data Count > 5% error

(E)

Data Count < 5% error

(F)

Data Count within 5% error

18

(G) = (D) (E) (F)

% Heat Balance within 5% error

82

(G) / (D) x 100%

Chiller Plant Efficiency

Formula

(A) / (B)

Based on the above, 82% of the computed heat balance falls within 5% > 80% ok
Note : The actual heat balance shall be conducted over the entire normal operating
hours with more than 80% of the computed heat balance within 5% over one (1)
week period.

133

Abbreviations used in Worked Example 1-2(e)


AHU

Air Handling Unit

Bypass Line

BPV

Bypass Valve (2-Way Modulating)

CCV

Cooling Coil Valve

Chiller

BP

CH
CHWLR

Chilled Water Load Return


Temperature

CHWP

Chilled Water Pump

CHWR

Chilled Water Return Temperature

CHWS

Chilled Water Supply Temperature

Cp

Specific Heat Capacity of Water

4.19 kJ/kg.C

CWP

Condenser Water Pump

CWR

Condenser Water Return


Temperature

CWS

Condenser Water Supply


Temperature

CT

Cooling Tower

KW

Electrical Power Consumption

KW/RT
MV

Electrical Input kW per


Refrigeration Tonnage
Motorized Valve

kW
I kW/ton
-

qevaporator

Cooling Load

kW or RT

qcondenser

Heat Rejection

kW or RT

Winput

Energy Balance

134

Abbreviations used in Worked Example 1-2(e)


C

Degrees Celsius

l/s

Liters per second

kW

Kilo-Watts

RT

Refrigeration Ton

Temperature difference, Delta T

Symbols used in Worked Example 1-2(e)

AHU

CCV (2-Way Modulating)

CH

CHWP
CHWR
CHWS
CWP
CWR
CWS

CT

Flow Meter

FM

MV
Water Immersion Sensor

135

NRB 1-3 BUILDING ENVELOPE DESIGN / THERMAL PARAMETERS

Objectives

Enhance the overall thermal performance of building envelope to minimise heat gain
that would improve indoor thermal comfort and encourage natural ventilation.

Applicability

Applicable to non air-conditioned building spaces with aggregate areas > 10% of the
total floor areas excluding both carparks and common areas.

Baseline
Standard

Baseline standard for 1-3(d) - U value for roof :


Weight range (kg/m2)
Under 50
50 to 230
Over 230

Weight Group
Light
Medium
Heavy

Maximum Thermal Transmittance (W/m2K)


0.8
1.1
1.5

Requirements 1-3(a) Up to 15 points can be scored if the building envelope is designed with
minimum direct west facing faade by having better building orientation.
Where there is no west facing faade, the points scored will be 30 points and
the requirements under 1-3(b)(i), b(ii) and (c) will not be applicable for scoring.
Points scored = 15 [ 0.3 x (% of west facing facade areas over total faade
areas)]
Note : Orientation of faade that falls within the range of 22.5 N of W and 22.5 S of
W will be defined as west facing faade (see illustrations below). Core walls for lifts or
staircases and toilets that are located within this range are exempted in computation.

10

West
facing
facade

West
facing
facade

Illustration 1
An example of direct west
facing facade

N
40

Illustration 2
The block is orientated 10N of W that is
less than of 22.5 N of W. In this
instance, the faade is defined as west
facing faade.

Illustration 3
The block is orientated 40N of W that
exceeds 22.5N of W and hence the
faade is not considered as west facing
faade in the computation.

136

Requirements Exception: For existing buildings, the requirement NRB 1-3(a) may be excluded in the
Contd

computation. The total score obtained from NRB 1-3(b), (c) and (d) will be prorated
accordingly.

1-3(b) Up to 10 points can be scored for design with (i) minimum west facing window
openings and/or (ii) having effective sunshading provision for windows with
minimum shading of 30% on the west faade.
For 1-3 (b)(i) Points scored = 10 [0.1 x (% of west facing window areas
over total west facing faade
areas)]
For 1-3 (b)(ii) Points scored = 0.1 x (% of west facing window areas with
sunshading devices over total west
facing faade areas)
Important notes : For 1-3 (b)(ii) Points can only be scored if the sunshading devices
meet at least a shading of 30% as tabulated in Table 1-3(b) below :
Table 1-3(b) : Minimum Requirement on Shading Devices for West Facade
Types of Sunshading
Angle of
Desired Shading
Devices
Inclination
30%
40%
50%
60%
o
0.6
0.9
1.5
0
Horizontal Shading (R1)
0.4
0.6
0.9
1.8
20 o
0.4
0.5
0.7
1.1
40 o
o
2.1
0
Vertical Shading (R2)
1.1
1.7
2.5
20 o
0.7
1
1.4
40 o
0.6
0.9
1.1
2.8
50 o
where
Horizontal Shading/Projections (R1)
P
R1 = H

1 = Angle of inclination

Vertical Shading/Projections (R2)


P
R2 = W

2 = Angle of inclination

137

Requirements 1.3(c) Up to 5 points can be scored for external west facing wall that are designed
with better thermal transmittance that is a U-value of wall equal or less than
2 W/m2K.
Contd
Points scored = 0.05 x (% of the external west facing walls areas with
U-value of 2 W/m2K or less over the total west facing
faade areas)
1.3(d) Up to 5 points can be scored for roof design with better thermal transmittance
that is a lower U value of roof than the baseline standard.
Points scored = 1 point for every 0.1 W/m2K reduction from the baseline.
Note : If there are combinations of roof types, the average reduction from the
baseline can be derived by pro-rating the roof areas

Documentary
Evidences

For 1-3(a)
Architectural plan layouts and elevation drawings of the faades of all blocks.
Highlight those areas that are considered as west facing faade ; and
Calculation showing the percentage of west facing faade areas in the
prescribed tabulated format as shown in the worked example 1-3(a).
For 1-3(b)(i) and (ii)
Architectural plan layouts and elevation drawings of west facing faade and
window openings;
Sectional drawings showing the details of the sunshading devices. Highlight
those sunshading devices that meet the 30% shading requirement ;
Window schedules or drawings showing the areas of the west facing windows;
and
Calculation showing the percentage of west facing window areas in the
prescribed tabulated format as shown in worked example 1-3(b).
For 1-3(c)
Architectural drawings highlighting the material types and wall areas that are of
better thermal transmittance (U-value);
Detailed sectional drawings showing the wall composition and the respective
U-values;
Extracts of the tender specification that states the thermal transmittance
properties to be adopted for west facing walls; and
Technical product information and relevant calculation on the U-value of the wall
materials used.
For 1-3(d)
Plan layout and sectional details of the different roof types of the development;
Extracts of the tender specification that states the thermal transmittance
properties of roof ;
Detailed sectional drawings showing the roof composition and the respective
U-values; and
Technical product information and relevant calculation of the U-value of the roof.

References

138

Worked
Example
1-3(a)

(1) Determine the total areas of external faade.


(2) Identify the faade areas that are within the range of 22.5 N of W and
22.5 S of W as west facing facades
Background info
Block 1:
Total faade areas
= 6000 m2
West facing faade areas = 1500 m2
Block 2 :

Total faade areas


= 8000 m2
West facing faade areas = 1500 m2

Block 3 :

Total faade areas


= 3000 m2
West facing faade areas = 1000 m2 (These wall areas are envelope
of core wall for lifts and staircases)

Table 1-3(a) Minimum direct west facing external facade


Area of west
Total area of
% of west facing
facing external
external
external facade
faade (m2)
facade
(a)
(b)
Block 1
1500
6000
(a)/ (b) x100%
Block 2
1500
8000
Block 3
Total

Exempted

3000

3000

17000

Points scored for 1-3(a) = 15 [0.3 x ( (a)/ (b)) x100%)]


= 15 [0.3 x (3000/17000) x 100%] = 9.71 points

Example
1-3(b)

(1) Identify the faade areas that are within the range of 22.5 N of W and
22.5 S of W as west facing faade.
(2) Determine the window areas on these facades.
(1) Determine if the sunshading provisions meet the minimum 30% shading.
Background info
Block 1 : West facing faade areas = 1500 m2
Window areas
= 600 m2
There are two types of sunshading devices; 70% of the units have sunshading
devices with horizontal projection (P) of 0.6 m and the rest of the 30% have
sunshading devices with projection of 0.4 m.

139

Illustration 1 : Sectional detail of


horizontal sunshading devices
Check
To determine if the sunshading provisions
(i.e. horizontal projection (P)) meet the
minimum 30% shading.
Refer to Table 1-3(b)
P = 0.6m (70%)
& 0.4 m (30%)

1m

Worked
Example
1-3(b)

Angle of inclination 0o
R1 = 0.6 / 1.0 = 0.6
Min horizontal projection P = R1 x H
= 0.6 x 1
= 0.6 m
Therefore sunshading devices with
horizontal projection of 0.4 m will not be
considered as effective.

Block 2 :

West facing faade areas = 1500 m2


Window areas
= 1000 m2

Illustration 2 : Plan view of


vertical sunshading devices

Check
To determine if the sunshading provisions
meet (i.e. vertical projection (P)) the
minimum 30% shading.

P=1.4m

30o

Refer to Table 1-3(b)

Tilted Angle 30o


R2 = (1.1+0.7) / 2 =0.9 (interpolation)
Min vertical projection P

= R2 x W
= 0.9 x 1.5
= 1.35 m
Therefore, sunshading devices with vertical
projection of 1.4 m ok.

2mm
1.5

Block 3 :

West facing faade areas = 1000 m2 (These wall areas are envelope
= 0 m2

Window areas

140

of core wall for lifts and staircases)

Worked
Example
1-3(b)
Contd

Points scored for 1-3(b)(i) and 1-3(b)(ii) are as follows:

Table 1-3(b)(i) : Minimum west facing windows openings


Description
Area of west
Total area of
% of west facing
facing window
west facing
window areas over
area (m2)
external
total west facing
faade (m2)
external faade areas
(a)
(b)
Block 1
600
1500
Block 2
1000
1500
(a)/ (b) x100%
Block 3
0
1000
Total
1600
4000

Points scored for 1-3(b)(i) = 10 [0.1 x (( (a)/ (b)) x 100%)]


= 10 [0.1 x (1600/4000) x 100%)] = 6 points
Table 1-3(b)(ii) : Effective sunshading provisions for west facing window with
minimum 30% shading
Description
Area of west
% of west facing
Total area of
facing window
window areas over
west facing
with effective
total west facing
external
sunshading
external faade areas
faade (m2)
provision (m2)
(b)
(a)
Block 1

420

1500

(70% of 600)
Block 2

1000

1500

Block 3

1000

1420

4000

Total

Points scored for 1-3(b)(ii)

(a)/ (b) x100%

= 0.1 x [( (a)/ (b)) x100%]


= 0.1 x [(1420 / 4000) x 100%] = 3.55 points

Therefore, points scored for 1-3(b) = 6 + 3.55 = 9.55 points

141

Worked
Example
1-3(c)

Window areas = 600 m2


Background info
Wall areas
= 900 m2
Block 1 : West facing faade areas = 1500 m2
U-value of west facing wall areas is 2.0 W/ m2K

Block 2 :

Block 3 :

Window areas = 1000 m2


Wall areas
= 500 m2

West facing faade areas = 1500 m2


Window areas
= 1000 m2
U-value of west facing walls is 2.5 W/ m2K > 2.0 W/ m2K not ok
2

West facing faade areas = 1000 m


U-value of external west facing walls is 2 W/ m2K

Window areas = 0 m2
= 1000 m2
Wall areas

Table 1-3(c): Better thermal transmittance of external west facing walls


Total area of
Description
Area of external west
% of west facing
west facing
facing walls with
window areas over
external faade
total west facing
U-value of 2W/m2K
(m2)
external faade
or less (m2)
(b)
areas
(a)
Block 1
900
1500
Block 2
0
1500
(a)/ (b) x100%
Block 3
1000
1000
Total
1900
4000

Points scored for 1-3(c) = 0.05 x [( (a)/ (b)) x100%)]


= 0.05 x [(1900/4000) x 100%] = 2.4 points

Worked
Example
1-3(d)

Background info
Proposed development has 3 roof types with the designed U value of the roof as
tabulated in the table below
Table 1-3(d) : Better Thermal Transmittance of Roof
Roof
Weight
Group

Max Uvalue of
Roof

U-value
of Roof

Roof
Area

Reduction from
baseline roof U
value

(W/m2K)

(W/m2K)

(m2)

W/m2K

(A)

(B)

(C )

D= A-B

E= (DxC)/Total
Area

Light

0.8

0.47

6000.00

0.33

0.27

Medium

1.1

0.53

800.00

0.57

0.06

Heavy

1.5

0.65

600.00

1.42

0.07

7400.00

Average Reduction

0.4

Total area

Average reduction = 0.4


Therefore, points scored for 1-3(d) = (0.4 / 0.1) x 1 = 4 points

142

Average
Reduction
prorated based on
areas

NRB 1-4 NATURAL VENTILATION / MECHANICAL VENTILATION

Objectives

Encourage building design that facilitates good natural ventilation or with provision
for ventilation by efficient mechanical ventilation system.

Applicability

Applicable to non air-conditioned building spaces with aggregate areas > 10% of
the total floor areas excluding carparks and common areas.

Baseline
Standard

1-4(a)(ii) - Ventilation simulation modeling and analysis shall be based on the


methodology specified in Annex C Ventilation Simulation Methodology and
Requirements.
1-4(b) Mechanical Ventilation : SS 553 : 2009 Code of Practice for Airconditioning and mechanical ventilation in buildings. Reference made to SS553 :
2009 Table 8 Fan power limitation in mechanical ventilation systems
Option 1 Fan System Motor Nameplate Power
Baseline : SS553:2009 Table 8 Fan power limitation and as prescribed below :
Baseline

Allowable Motor Nameplate Power

Air Distribution System Type


Fan systems with motor
nameplate power 4kW
Air Handling Units (AHUs)
/Fan Coil Units (FCUs)
(Constant Volume)

(kW/m3/s)

(W/CMH)

1.7

0.47

Fan systems with nameplate


motor power < 4 kW

No baseline

Option 2 Fan System Input Power


Baseline : ASHRAE 90.1: 2010 Clause 6.5.3.1 and as prescribed below :
Baseline

Allowable Fan System Input Power

Air Distribution System Type


Fan systems with motor
nameplate power 4kW

(kW/m3/s)

(W/CMH)

Air Handling Units (AHUs)


/Fan Coil Units (FCUs)
(Constant Volume)

1.5

0.42

Fan systems with motor


nameplate motor power < 4 kW

0.6

0.17

* Applicable pressure drop adjustments can be considered based on ASHRAE 90.1

Table 6.5.3.1.1B and are subject to BCAs evaluation

Requirements

Natural Ventilation
1-4(a)(i) Up to 10 points can be scored for building design that utilises prevailing
wind conditions to achieve adequate cross ventilation.
1 point for every 10% of units/rooms with window openings facing north and
south directions
Points scored = 1 x (% of units / 10)
Note: In Singapore, the prevailing wind comes from two predominant directions; that
is the north to north-east during the Northeast monsoon season and south to south143

It is not necessary for the window openings to be located perpendicularly to the


prevailing wind direction. An oblique angle is considered acceptable (see illustrations
below).
Prevailing wind directions from north to
north-east

Contd

east during the South-west monsoon season. Hence, buildings designed with
window openings facing the north and south directions have the advantage of the
prevailing wind conditions that would enhance indoor thermal comfort.
Meteorological data on the more precise wind direction and velocity of the site
location can also be used as the basis for the design.

Prevailing wind directions from south to


south-east

Requirements

Illustration 1 - Building layout shows all rooms with window openings facing the
north and south directions.

Prevailing wind
directions from north
to north-east

Room
2

Room Room
3
4

Room 1

Prevailing wind
directions from
south to southeast

Room
5

Room 8
Room
7
Room 6

Illustration 2 - Building layout shows not all rooms with window openings facing the north
and south directions. Room 2 to Room 5 would only have prevailing wind in one direction.
Only Room 1 and 6 can be considered meeting the requirement 1-4(a).
Alternative compliance : The application of ventilation simulation can be used to prove that
the building layout utilises prevailing wind conditions and could achieve adequate cross
ventilation within the indoor units through sufficient window openings. The ventilation
simulation should be carried out in the same conditions outlined in para 1-4(a)/(ii) below.
Points shall only be scored if the recommendations from the simulation are implemented.
144

Requirements
Contd

1-4(a)(ii) 5 points for the use of ventilation simulation modeling and analysis or
wind tunnel testing to identify the most effective building design and layout
in achieving good natural ventilation. Additional 5 points can only be
scored if the recommendations from the ventilation simulation or wind
tunnel testing are implemented and the weighted average wind velocity
within the units meets 0.60 m/s.
The ventilation simulation shall be carried in accordance with the
assumptions and methodology stated in Annex C Ventilation Simulation
Methodology and Requirement
Mechanical Ventilation
1-4 (b) 15 points can be scored for building with energy efficient mechanical
ventilation system design
0.6 point for every percentage improvement in the air distribution system
efficiency from the baseline standard.
Points scored = 0.6 x (% improvement)
Important notes : Where there is a combination of naturally ventilated and mechanical
ventilated spaces, the points scored will only be based on the predominant ventilation
modes of normally occupied spaces.

Documentary
Evidences

Natural Ventilation
For 1-4(a)(i)
Architectural plan layouts showing the units / rooms of all blocks with highlights
of those with window openings in the N-S direction and/or with air-conditioned
systems;
Calculation showing the percentage of units or rooms with window openings
facing north and south directions in the prescribed tabulated format as shown in
the worked example 1-4(a)(i).
For 1-4(a)(ii)

Ventilation simulation or wind tunnel testing reports summarising the analysis


and simulation results for each typical space as well as the recommendations
for design as specified in Annex C.
Mechanical Ventilation
For 1-4(b)

Architectural plan layouts showing the mode of ventilation for units / rooms of
all blocks are mechanically ventilated

References

Mechanical ventilation design plan layouts

Detailed calculations of fan static calculations and design air flow rate

MV fan equipment schedule

Technical product information of all MV fans (to include fan curve)

145

Worked
Example
1-4(a)(i)

Background info
A school development comprises two 3-storey classroom block A and A1 with
majority of the window openings facing the N-S direction, a 4 storey classroom
Block B with window opening in the E-W direction and three blocks of office,
meeting rooms and computer rooms that are air-conditioned.
Ref

Description

Units/Rooms
with window
openings in
the N-S
direction

Total no. of
naturally
ventilated
units/room

(a)

(b)

Classroom Blk A & A1

40

60

Classroom Blk B

40

Offices, meeting rooms


and computer rooms
with air-conditioning

NA

NA

40

100

Total :

Points scored

Worked
Example
1-4(b)

% of units/rooms
with window
openings in N-S
direction

(a)/ (b) x100%

= 1 x (% of units / 10)
= 1 x [( (a)/ (b) x100%) /10]
= 1 x [(40/100 x 100%) / 10] = 4 points < 10 points (max)

Background info
The small industrial factory development comprises of 4-storey block with 6
workshop spaces that are mechanically ventilated.
MV fan schedule:

Option 1
Fan Motor
Nameplate
Power

Workshop

1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6

Fan

FAF
1-1
FAF
1-2
FAF
1-3
FAF
2-1
FAF
2-2
FAF
2-3
EAF
1-1
EAF
1-2
EAF
1-3
EAF
2-1
EAF
2-2
EAF
2-3

Fan
Type

Floor
Area
(m2)

Space
Height
(m)

650

Air
Flow
Rate
(CMH)

External
Static
(Pa)

Motor
Nameplate
Power
(kW)

Fan
Efficiency
(W/CMH)

10

39000

650

11

0.28

650

10

39000

650

11

0.28

650

10

39000

650

11

0.28

500

24000

500

5.5

0.23

500

24000

500

5.5

0.23

500

24000

500

5.5

0.28

Axial

ACH

6
650

10

39000

650

11

0.28

650

10

39000

650

11

0.28

650

10

39000

650

11

0.28

500

24000

500

5.5

0.23

500

24000

500

5.5

0.23

500

24000

500

5.5

0.23

Total fan power = 99 kW


Total air flow rate = 378,000 CMH
146

Baseline: Total fan power = 378,000 CMH x 0.47 W/CMH


= 177.66 kW
Points scored = 0.6 x (% improvement)
= 0.6 x [(177.66 99)/177.66 x 100%]
= 0.6 x 44%
= 26.6 points > 15 (max)
Therefore, point scored is 15 points.

MV fan schedule:
Option 2
Fan System
Input Power

Workshop

1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6

Fan

FAF
1-1
FAF
1-2
FAF
1-3
FAF
2-1
FAF
2-2
FAF
2-3
EAF
1-1
EAF
1-2
EAF
1-3
EAF
2-1
EAF
2-2
EAF
2-3

Fan
Type

Floor
Area
(m2)

Space
Height
(m)

650

ACH

Air
Flow
Rate
(CMH)

External
Static
(Pa)

Fan
System
Input
Power
(kW)

Fan
Efficiency
(W/CMH)

10

39000

650

8.28

0.21

650

10

39000

650

8.28

0.21

650

10

39000

650

8.28

0.21

500

24000

500

3.92

0.16

500

24000

500

3.92

0.16

500

24000

500

3.92

0.16

Axial

6
650

10

39000

650

8.28

0.21

650

10

39000

650

8.28

0.21

650

10

39000

650

8.28

0.21

500

24000

500

3.92

0.16

500

24000

500

3.92

0.16

500

24000

500

3.92

0.16

Total fan power = 73.24 kW


Total air flow rate = 378,000 CMH
Baseline: Total fan power = 378,000 CMH x 0.42 W/CMH
= 158.76 kW
Points scored = 0.6 x (% improvement)
= 0.6 x [(158.76 73.24)/158.76 x 100%]
= 0.6 x 54%
= 32 points > 15 (max)
Therefore, point scored is 15 points.

147

NRB 1-5 DAYLIGHTING

Objectives

Encourage design that optimises the use of effective daylighting to reduce energy
use for artificial lighting.

Applicability

1-5(a) Applicable to all normally occupied areas within the development.


1-5(b) Applicable to all common areas within the development.

Baseline
Standard

1-5(a) The computation of daylighting and glare simulation shall be based on the
methodology specified in Annex D Daylighting and Glare Simulation Methodology
and Requirements.
Minimum illuminance level and comfortable Unified Glared Rating (UGR) shall be in
accordance with SS 531: Part 1 Code of Practice for Lighting of Work Places
Indoor and the design intent.

Requirements

1-5(a) Up to 3 points can be scored for the use of daylight and glare simulation
analysis to optimise the use of effective daylighting for normally occupied spaces.
The daylighting provision is deemed to be effective if the areas within the prescribed
distances from building perimeters (that is the perimeter daylight zones) meet the
minimum illuminance level and acceptable Unified Glared Rating (UGR) at all glare
viewpoints.
Points can be scored if at least 75% of the units are designed with effective
daylighting provision. The scoring will be based on the extent of the perimeter
daylight zones, which is expressed as in term of the distances from faade
perimeters as shown in the table below.
Distance from Faade Perimeters (m)

Points Allocation

3.0

4.0 - 5.0

> 5.0

1-5(b) Up to 3 points can be scored for daylighting provision for the following
common areas; 0.5 point can be scored if at least 80% of each applicable area is
designed with daylighting provision:

Toilets
Staircases
Corridors

Lift lobbies
Atriums
Carparks

Important Notes: All daylit areas must be integrated with automatic electric lighting control
system.

Documentary
Evidences

For 1-5(a)
Schedules showing the total number of normally occupied areas in the
development and those with acceptable glare exposure and effective
daylighting; and
Daylight and glare simulation report summarizing the analysis and modeling
results for each normally occupied area that meets the requirement as specified
in Annex D.
148

For 1-5(b)
Extracts of the tender specification or drawings showing the use of daylighting
for toilets, staircases, corridors, lift lobbies, atriums and carparks where
applicable.

References

SS 531: Part 1 Code of Practice for Lighting of Work Places Indoor

Worked
Example
1-5(a)

Proposed development comprises a 30 storey office block with 60 office units.


Daylight and glare simulation has been conducted for the development. Based on
simulation, 75% of all office units (i.e. 45 units) can achieve effective daylighting at
a distance of 4.5m from building faade perimeters and meet the acceptable Unified
Glared Rating .
Office Unit
type
1
2
3
4

No. of Units
10
20
15
15

Average Distance from


Faade Perimeter (m)
4.6
5.3
5.1
2.8

Percentage of units meeting the minimum requirement = (10+20+15) x100 = 75%


60

Weighted average distance

Distance for
4.5m from
building
perimeters

=
=

(10)(4.6)+20(5.3)+(15)(5.1)+(15)(2.8)
60
4.5 m

Distance from Faade


Perimeters (m)
3.0
4.0 - 5.0
> 5.0

Points Allocation
1
2
3

Points scored for 1-5(a) = 2 points

Worked
Example
1-5(b)

Proposed development has the following provision:


All staircases, corridors, lift lobbies and atriums are designed with adequate
daylighting that would eliminate the need for artificial lightings during daytime.
70% of of the carpark areas have daylighting provision while the other 30% of the
carpark areas would need to employ the use of artificial lightings during daytime to
maintain proper lighting level.
0.5 point each for staircases, corridors, lift lobbies and atriums
No point for carparks as it does not meet the minimum 80% of the applicable areas
Therefore, points scored for 1-5(b) = 2 points

149

NRB 1-6 ARTIFICIAL LIGHTING

Objectives

Encourage the use of better efficient lighting to minimise energy consumption from
lighting usage while maintaining proper lighting level.

Applicability

Applicable to lighting provisions for the type of usage specified in the SS 530
Clause 7 Lighting power budget.

Baseline
Standard

Maximum lighting power budget stated in SS 530 - Code of Practice for Energy
Efficiency Standard for Building Services and Equipment.

Requirements

Up to 12 points if tenants light is provided OR Up to 5 points if tenants light is


excluded for the improvement in the lighting power consumption.
0.3 point for every percentage improvement in the lighting provisions over the
baseline standard. That is
Points scored = 0.3 x (% improvement)
Display lighting and specialised lighting are to be included in the calculation of
lighting power budget.
The design service illuminance, lamp efficacies and the light output ratios of
luminaries shall be in accordance with SS 531 : Part 1 Code of Practice for
Lighting of Work Places - Indoor

Documentary
Evidences

References

Lighting layout plan;

Lighting schedules showing the numbers, locations and types of lighting


luminaries used;

Calculation of the proposed lighting power budget and the percentage


improvement in the prescribed tabulated format as shown in the worked
example 1-6;

Tabulation showing the designed lux level and the minimum lux level based on
code requirement for the respective areas; and

Technical product information of the lighting luminaries used.

SS 530 Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency Standard for Building Services and
Equipment.
SS 531 : Part 1 Code of Practice for Lighting of Work Places - Indoor

Worked
Example
1-6

(1) Determine the total power consumption based on the lighting layout design for
each area and light fitting types used.
(2) Calculate the total power consumption based on the maximum lighting power
budget stated in SS 530.
(3) Calculate the percentage improvement in the total power consumption.

150

Worked
Example
1-6 Contd

Table 1-6-1: Total power consumption based on each fitting type


No. of
Fittings

Total power
consumption
based on
fitting type

(D)

(E)

[(C+D) x (E)]

2x28

245

14455

T5

2x 28

210

12390

T8

1x36

15

585

Surface
downlight

2x26

416

Light
Fitting
Type

Power
Consumption
per fitting
(W)

Ballast
Loss

(A)

(B)

(C)

Office Space
Type 1

1500

T5

Office Space
Type 2

1250
75

Description

Meeting
Room

Areas
(m2)

(W)

Corridors
Type 1

150

T5

2x28

15

885

Corridors
Type 2

205

T5

2x28

15

885

Surface
downlight

1x70

630

T8

2x36

87

6525

Surface
downlight

1x150

10

1500

Atrium

850

Carparks

7500

T5

2x28

436

25724

Staircase

300

T5

2x28

20

1180

Total :

65175

Table 1-6-2 : Total power consumption based on design and SS 530 requirements
Description

Areas
2
(m )

Design Data

SS 530 Requirements

Total Power
Consumption
(by area)(W)

Design
Lighting Power
2
Budget (W/m )

Reference
Lighting Power
2
Budget (W/m )

Reference
Total Power
Consumption
(by area) (W)

(A)

(F)

(F/A)

(H)

(H x A)

Office Space
Type 1

1500

14455

9.64

15

22500

Office Space
Type 2

1250

12390

9.91

15

18750

Meeting
Room

75

1001

13.35

15

1125

Corridors
Type 1

150

885

5.90

10

1500

Corridors
Type 2

205

1515

7.39

10

2050

Atrium

850

8025

9.44

10

8500

Carparks

7500

25724

3.43

37500

Staircase

300

1180

3.93

1800

Total :

65175

93725

151

Worked
Example
1-6 Contd

% improvement in the lighting power consumption = [(HxA) - (F)] /(HxA) x 100%


= (93725-65175)/93725 x 100%
= 30.46%
Points scored

= 0.3 x 30.46% = 9.14 points

Therefore, points scored is 9.14 points if tenants lighting is included ;


and points scored is 5 points (max) if tenants lighting is excluded.

152

NRB 1-7 VENTILATION IN CARPARKS

Objectives

Encourage the use of energy efficient design and control of ventilation systems in
carparks.

Applicability

Applicable to all carpark spaces in the development.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

1-7(a) 4 points can be scored if the carparks spaces that are fully naturally
ventilated.
1-7(b) For carparks have to be mechanically ventilated, points can be scored for
the use of carbon monoxide (CO) sensors in regulating such demand based
on the mode of mechanical ventilation (MV) used; 2.5 points for carparks
using fume extract system and 2 points for those with MV with or without
supply.
Note : Where there is a combination of different ventilation mode adopted for carpark
design, the points scored under this requirement will be prorated accordingly.

Documentary
Evidences

For 1-7(a) and (b)


Plan layouts showing all carpark provisions for the development with highlights
of the carpark spaces that are designed to be naturally ventilated and/or
mechanical ventilated;
Plan layouts indicating the locations of CO sensors and the mode of ventilation
adopted for the design; and
Calculation showing the points allocation if there is a combination of different
ventilation modes adopted for the carpark design.

References

SS 553 Code of Practice for Air-Conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation in


Buildings.

Worked
Example
1-7

Proposed development has a 6-storey naturally ventilated carparks and one level of
mechanically ventilated basement carparks with CO sensors to be installed to
regulate MV.
Areas of naturally ventilated carparks

= 6 x 600 = 3600 m2

Areas of basement carparks

= 600 m2

Total areas

= 4200 m2

Points scored for 1-7

= (3600/4200) x 4 + (600/4200) x 2
= 3.71 points

153

NRB 1-8 VENTILATION IN COMMON AREAS

Objectives

Encourage the use of energy efficient design and control of ventilation systems in
common areas.

Applicability

Applicable to the following common areas of the development.

Toilets
Staircases
Corridors

Lift Lobbies
Atriums

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

Up to 5 points can be scored for the use of natural ventilation as an effective


passive cooling design strategy to reduce the energy used by air-conditioning
systems in these common areas.
Extent of coverage : At least 90% of each applicable area (by numbers).
Points are scored based on the mode of ventilation provided in these applicable
areas.
Natural ventilation 1.5 points for each area
Mechanical ventilation 0.5 point for each area

Documentary
Evidences

Plan layouts showing the applicable areas and the respective modes of

ventilation; and
Schedules showing the numbers, locations of the applicable areas and the

modes of ventilation used.

References

SS 553 Code of Practice for Air-Conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation in


Buildings.

Worked
Example
1-8

Proposed development has the following details :


No. of toilets = 45 ; where 10 units are designed with air-conditioning
% of toilet units with natural ventilation = (45-10)/45 = 77.8 % < 90% and hence
no point for this item
No. of staircases = 100 ; all are mechanical ventilated 0.5 point
No. of lift lobbies = 22 ; all are naturally ventilated 1.5 points
Points scored for 1-8 = 0.5 +1.5 = 2 points < 5 points(max)

154

NRB 1-9 LIFTS AND ESCALATORS

Objectives

Encourage the use of energy efficient lifts and escalators.

Applicability

Applicable to all lifts and escalators in the development.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

1 point can be scored for the use of lifts with energy efficient features such as AC
variable voltage and variable frequency (VVVF) motor drive or equivalent, and sleep
mode.
1 point can be scored for the use of escalators with occupancy sensors to regulate
usage.

Documentary
Evidences

Extracts of the tender specification indicating the types of lifts, escalators and
related features used; and
Technical information of the lifts and escalators.

References

Worked
Example
1-9

Proposed development has the following provision :


Two lift types : Type L1 with VVVF motor drive and sleep mode features
Type L2 with VVVF motor drive and sleep mode features
Two escalator types : Type E1 with VVVF motor drive and occupancy sensors
Type E2 without VVVF motor drive and occupancy sensors
1 points for the use of lifts with VVVF and sleep mode features.
No point for escalators as not all escalators are designed with occupancy sensors
Points scored for 1-9 = 1 point

155

NRB 1-10 ENERGY EFFICIENT PRACTICES & FEATURES

Objectives

Encourage the use of energy efficient practices and features that are innovative
and have positive environmental impact in terms of energy saving.

Applicability

Applicable to practices and features that are not listed in the requirements under
Part 1 Energy Efficiency.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements 1-10 (a) 1 point can be scored for the practice of using Energy Efficiency Index (EEI)
as a building performance indicator to measure the buildings unit area
energy consumption for future monitoring and improvements.
Calculation of EEI :
EEI = [(TBEC - DCEC) / (GFA DCA)] x (NF/OH)
where:
(a) TBEC
(b) DCEC
(c) GFA
(d) DCA
(e) NF

:
:
:
:
:

Total building energy consumption (kWh/year)


Data centre energy consumption (kWh/year)
Gross floor area (exclude car park area) (m2)
Data centre area (m2)
Normalising factor based on a typical weekly operating
hours that is 55 hrs/week
: Weighted weekly operating hours (hrs/week)

(g) OH
Note :

(1)
(2)
(3)

EEI is based on 100% occupancy rate for consistency.


All major energy consumption equipments are to be included
in the estimation of total building energy consumption.
For industrial buildings, process load should be excluded.

1-10(b) Up to 1 point can be scored for the provision of greenery system on east
and west faade to reduce the heat gain through the building envelope.
1 point for high impact where provision is more than 50% of applicable
facade areas. 0.5 point for low impact where provision is at 25% of the
same.
1-10(c) 0.5 point for the use of energy efficient equipment or products that are
certified by approved local certification body for at least 90% of the
applicable equipment types or products (Up to 2 points)
1-10(d)

Up to 8 points can be scored for the use of the following approved energy
efficient features depending on the potential energy saving. 3 points for
every 1% energy saving over total building consumption.

Thermal storage system


Heat recovery devices
Light shelves
Occupancy sensors for staircases half landing and toilets
Lifts with better energy efficient features such as regenerative or
gearless drive system
Sun pipes for natural lighting
Ductless fans for basement ventilation
Auto-condenser tube cleaning system
Photo sensors to maximize the use of daylighting
156

Important notes :
(i) For features that are not listed NRB 1-10(c), the QP is required to submit the details
showing the positive environmental impacts and potential energy savings of the proposed
features to BCA for assessment.
(ii) The potential energy savings for the following devices are subject to the cap based on the
following norm.
List of Systems/Devices
CO sensors
Occupancy Sensors
Photo Sensors

Documentary
Evidences

Energy Savings Cap


15%
15%
15%

For 1-10(a)
Calculation of the Energy Efficiency Index (EEI) in the prescribed tabulated
format as shown in the worked example 1-10(a).
For 1-10(b)
Plan layouts showing the vertical greenery provision and building elevations;
and
Calculation showing the extent of the vertical greenery provision over the east
and west faade areas as shown in worked example 1-10(b).
For 1-10(c) and (d)
Extracts of the tender specification showing the provision of the proposed
energy efficient features /equipment/products and the extent of implementation
where applicable;
Technical product information on the energy efficient features used; and
Calculation of the potential energy savings that could be reaped from the use of
these energy efficient features.
Certification details from approved local certification body

References

NUS Centre for Total Building Performance:


http://www.bdg.nus.edu.sg/buildingenergy/e_energy/audit_results.html

Worked
Example
1-10(a)

(1) Determine the total annual building electricity consumption (TBEC) based on
the estimated electricity consumption and usage pattern in term of operation
hours of all the major energy consumption systems and equipments.
(2) Compute the Energy Efficiency Index of the building .
Background info :
Assume a proposed development with GFA of 86 000 m2, operational hours per
week is 55 hours at 100% occupancy rate. No data centre in the building.
Note that for tenant receptacle load, the nominal values shown in the following table can be
adopted.
Receptacle Loads
Computer intensive offices
General office areas
Large conference areas
Server/Computer rooms
Source: ASHRAE STD 90.1

Nominal Values
22 W/m2
16 W/m2
11 W/m2
540 W/m2

157

Worked
Example
1-10(a)
Contd

Table 1-10(a) : Total Building Electricity Consumption (TBEC) per year


Total Annual Building Electricity
Consumption (KWh)/year

System/ Equipment

3094380

Lighting (Air-Conditioned Space)


Lighting- (Non Air-Conditioned Space)

236321

Exterior Lighting

405800
7924425

Air-Conditioned Plant
Air System Fans

632293

Mechanical Ventilation Fans

207571

Lifts

792966
45865

Escalators
Receptacle Equipment * (@16W/m2)

3936517
226088

Domestic Water Pump Systems

93789

Hot Water Systems

Others

17596015

Total :

Total annual building electricity consumption (TBEC) = 17596015 kWh/year


Therefore, the Energy Efficiency Index (EEI) of the building is as follows:
EEI = (TBEC/GFA) X (NF/ OH)
where NF is assumed to be 55 hrs/week
= (17596015 / 86000) x (55/55) and the operation hours is 55 hrs/week
= 204.6 kWh/m2 /yr
Points scored for 1-10(a) = 1 point
Worked
Example
1-10(b)

The same proposed development has incorporated vertical greenery systems on the
east and west faade to reduce heat gain to the building.
Areas of vertical greenery systems = 2000 m2
Total east and west faade areas = 4800 m

Worked
Example
1-10(c)

Worked
Example
1-10(d)

Percentage = 2000/4800 = 42% < 50%

Therefore , points scored = 0.5 point

Example of a proposed building development using the following M&E equipment /


products that are certified by the approved local certification body.
Equipment/Products
and Extent of coverage

With approved
certification

Points scored

(a) All Transformers

Yes

0.5

(b) 3 out of 5 Chillers

Yes

No point
(Note that provision < 90% for the same equipment type)

Proposed building development with installation of occupancy sensors for all


staircases. Assume that with occupancy sensors, the light fittings are not required
for 10 hours per day and the estimated annual electricity saving is 80 kWh
If the annual electricity for staircase lighting is 360 kWh
Check Cap : 15% of annual electricity on lighting = 0.15 (360) = 54 kWh
Assume that the TBEC = 15500 kWh
Therefore, % energy savings based on cap of 15% = 54/ 15500 = 0.348 %
Points scored for 1-10(c) = 3 points for every 1 % energy saving
= 3 x 0.348= 1.05 points
158

NRB 1-11 RENEWABLE ENERGY

Objectives

Encourage the use of renewable energy sources in buildings.

Applicability

Includes all renewable energy sources

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

Up to 20 points can be scored based on the expected energy efficiency index and
percentage replacement of electricity by the renewable energy source :

Expected
Energy
Efficiency
Index (EEI)

Every 1 % replacement of electricity (based on total building electricity


consumption) by renewable energy source (Up to 20 points)

Include tenants usage

Exclude tenants usage

30 kWh/m2/yr

5 points

3 points

< 30 kWh/m2/yr

3 points

1.5 points

Note : For computation of EEI, refer to worked example 1-10(a) under NRB 1-10 Energy
Efficient Features

Documentary
Evidences

References

Extracts of the tender specification and plans showing the location of the
renewable energy system and the extent of implementation;

Technical product information on the salient features of the renewable energy


system and the expected renewable energy generated; and

Calculation of the percentage replacement of electricity and the total annual


electricity consumption of the development.

159

(II) Other Green Requirements


Part 2 Water Efficiency

NRB 2-1
NRB 2-2
NRB 2-3
NRB 2-4

Water Efficient Fittings


Water Usage and Leak Detection
Irrigation System & Landscaping
Water Consumption of Cooling Towers

NRB 2-1 WATER EFFICIENT FITTINGS

Objectives

Reduce the use of potable water by using water efficient fittings covered under the
Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme (WELS).

Applicability

Applicable to all water fittings covered by the WELS as follows:

Basin Taps and Mixers


Sink/bib Taps and Mixers
Urinals and Urinal
Flush Valves

Shower Taps and Mixers or Showerheads


Dual-Flush Low Capacity Flushing Cisterns

Note: Water closets in public toilets fitted with flush valve and automatic flush devices are
to be excluded in computation.

Baseline
Standard

As specified under Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme (WELS).

Requirements

Up to 10 points can be scored based on the number and water efficiency rating of
the fitting type used.

Documentary
Evidences

References

WELS Rating

Water Efficiency

Weightage for Point Allocation

Very Good

Excellent

10

Extracts of the tender specification showing all the water fitting provisions for
the development;

Water fitting schedules showing the numbers, types and the approved rating of
the proposed fittings in the prescribed tabulated format shown in the worked
example; and

Calculation showing the percentage of proposed water fittings that are


approved under WELS.

For more information about WELS, refer to


http://www.pub.gov.sg/wels/Pages /default.aspx

161

Worked
Example
2-1

Example of a water fitting schedule showing the numbers, types and the approved
rating of the proposed fittings.
Table 2-1 Computation of the percentage of water fittings under WELS
Ref

Water Fitting Type

WELS rating

Mandatory
Requirement
MWELS

Total no.
based on
fitting type

Excellent

Very Good

Good

60

60

100

10

100

210

Shower taps and mixers

Basin taps and mixers

Sink/bib taps and mixers

Dual-flush low capacity


flushing cisterns

80

80

Urinals and urinal flush


valves

50

50

Total no. based on rating (A)

150

150

100

A =400

Weightage (B)

10

1500

1200

(AxB) =2700

Total (AXB)

Points scored

= (AxB) / A
= 2700/400
= 6.75 points

162

NRB 2-2 WATER USAGE AND LEAK DETECTION

Objectives

Promote the use of private meters and leak detection system for better control and
monitoring of water usage.

Applicability

Applicable to sub-metering provisions for major water uses of the building


developments.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

2-2(a) 1 point can be scored if private meters are provided for all major water
uses i.e. irrigation system, cooling towers and tenants usage where
applicable.
2-2(b) 1 point can be scored if all private meters are linked to the Building
Management System (BMS) for monitoring and leak detection. The BMS
should have specific alert features that can be set and triggered to detect
the possibility of water leakage during operation.

Documentary
Evidences

For 2-2(a)
Extracts from the tender specification stating the provision of sub-metering for
all major water uses.
Schematic drawings of cold water distribution system showing the location of
the sub-metering provided.
For 2-2(b)
Extracts from the tender specification and schematic drawings showing the
location of sub-metering and its linkage to the BMS.

References

163

NRB 2-3 IRRIGATION SYSTEM AND LANDSCAPING

Objectives

Reduce potable water consumption by provision of suitable systems that utilise


rainwater or recycled water and use of plants that require minimal irrigation to
reduce potable water consumption.

Applicability

Applicable to development with landscaping provision.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

2-3(a) 1 point can be scored for the use of non-potable water including rainwater
for landscape irrigation.
2-3(b) 1 point can be scored if more than 50% of the landscape areas are served
by water efficient irrigation system with features such as automatic sub-soil
drip irrigation system with rain sensor control.
2-3(c) 1 point can be scored if at least 80% of the landscape areas consist of
drought tolerant plants or plants that require minimal irrigation.

Documentary
Evidences

For 2-3(a)
Extracts of the tender specification showing how the non-potable water source
is to be provided;
Relevant drawings showing the location and design of the non-potable water

source; and
For rainwater harvesting and storage system, approval letter from PUB

is to be provided.
For 2-3(b)
Extracts of the tender specification showing the provision and details of water
efficient irrigation system;
Relevant layout plans showing the overall landscape areas and the areas that

would be served using the system; and


Calculation showing the percentage of the landscape areas that would be

served using the system.


For 2-3(c)
Relevant layout plans showing the overall landscape areas and the areas that

use drought tolerant plants or plants that require minimal irrigation; and
Calculation showing the percentage of the landscape areas that use drought

tolerant plants or plants that require minimal irrigation.

References

The list of drought tolerant or resistant plant species may be obtained from the
online website: http://florafaunaweb.nparks.gov.sg/.
164

NRB 2-4 WATER CONSUMPTION OF COOLING TOWERS

Objectives

Reduce potable water consumption for cooling purpose.

Applicability

Applicable to building developments with water-cooled central chillers systems,


water cooled package units and air-cooled VRF systems.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

2-4(a) 1 point can be scored for the use of cooling tower water treatment system
that can achieve 7 or better cycles of concentration at acceptable water
quality.
2-4(b) 1 point can be scored for the use of NEWater or on-site recycled water from
approved sources to meet the water demand for cooling purpose.

Documentary
Evidences

For 2-4(a)
Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirements to incorporate
with the cooling tower designs to achieve seven cycles of concentration;
Details showing how the cooling towers have been designed to achieve at

least seven cycles of concentration; and


Relevant drawings showing the location of the cooling towers and other

supporting systems that are required to achieve the designed concentration.


For 2-4(b)
Extracts of the tender specification showing how the NEWater or other
recycled water source is to be provided.
References

165

(II) Other Green Requirements


Part 3 Environmental
Protection

NRB 3-1
NRB 3-2
NRB 3-3
NRB 3-4
NRB 3-5
NRB 3-6
NRB 3-7

Sustainable Construction
Sustainable Products
Greenery Provision
Environmental Management Practice
Green Transport
Refrigerants
Stormwater Management

NRB 3-1 SUSTAINABLE CONSTRUCTION

Objectives

Encourage the adoption of building designs, construction practices and materials


that are environmentally friendly and sustainable.

Applicability

Generally applicable to all building developments.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

3-1(a) Up to 5 points can be scored with the use of (i) Green Cements and
(ii) Recycled Concrete Aggregates (RCA) and Washed Copper Slag
(WCS) as detailed in the following para 3-1(a)(i) and 3-1(a)(ii) :
3-1(a)(i) 1 point can be scored for use of Green Cements with approved
industrial by-product (such as Ground Granulated Blastfurnace Slag
(GGBS), silica fume, fly ash) to replace Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC)
by at least 10% by mass for superstructure applications
3-1(a)(ii) Up to 4 points can be scored for use of Recycled Concrete
Aggregates (RCA) and Washed Copper Slag (WCS) from approved
sources to replace coarse and fine aggregates for concrete production of
main building elements.
1 point for every incremental of 0.5 times (0.5x) of the usage requirement
(Up to 2x)
Quantity of RCA /WCS

Points Allocation

0.5 x usage requirement

1.0 x usage requirement

1.5 x usage requirement

2.0 x usage requirement

where usage requirement = 0.03 x Gross Floor Area (GFA in m2)


The RCA/WCS quantity (in tons) used for the concrete production of main
building elements can be derived from the concrete volume comprising
these recycled materials and based on the following conversion factor:
RCA (tons)= 1.0 (tons/m3) X (concrete vol in m3) X (RCA replacement rate)%
WCS (tons)= 0.7(tons/m3) X (concrete vol in m3) X (WCS replacement rate)%
Important notes :
For structural building elements, the use of RCA and WCS shall be limited to maximum 10%
replacement by mass of coarse/fine aggregates or as approved by the relevant authorities

167

Requirements
Contd

3-1(b) Up to 5 points are allocated to encourage more efficient concrete usage for
building components based on the Concrete Usage Index (CUI) of the
project.
Table 3-1 (b) Points allocation for project CUI
Project CUI (m3/m2)

Points Allocation

0.70

0.60

0.50

0.40

0.35

Note : Concrete Usage Index (CUI) is an indicator of the amount of concrete used to
construct the superstructure that includes both the structural and non-structural
elements. CUI does not include the concrete used for external works and substructural works such as basements and foundations. CUI is defined as the volume
of concrete in cubic metres needed to cast a square metre of constructed floor area.
It is expressed as:
Concrete Usage Index =

Documentary
Evidences

Concrete Volume in m3
Constructed Floor Area in m2

For 3-1(a)(i) & a(ii)


Extract of tender specification and concrete mix design showing the detailed
usage of Green Cements
Extract of tender specification and concrete mix design showing the detailed
usage of RCA and WCS.
Evidence of site delivery of these materials where applicable.
For 3-1(b)
Architectural and structural plan layout, elevation and sectional plans showing
the type of wall system used, the dimensions and sizes of all the building and
structural elements; and
Summary showing the quantity of concrete for each floor level in the prescribed
tabulated format shown in worked example 3-1(b). The calculation should
include all the building elements as listed in the worked example and the
derivation of the concrete volume should be detailed and made available for
evaluation.

References

168

Worked
Example
3-1(a)

Proposed development comprises a 3 storey office block and the following details :
Gross Floor Area (GFA) = 8,000 m2
Total Concrete Usage with replacement of coarse and fine aggregate with recycled
concrete aggregate and washed copper slag = 2 800 m3
(i) Use of Green Cements to replace 10% of OPC for superstructural works
Points scored for 3-1(a)(i) = 1 point
(ii) Use of recycled concrete aggregates (RCA) to replace coarse aggregate and
the use of washed copper slag (WCS) to replace fine aggregate for main
building elements with a replacement rate of 10%.
Usage requirement = 0.03 x GFA = 0.03 x 8000 = 240 tons
RCA (tons) = 1.0 (tons/m3) X (concrete vol in m3) X (RCA replacement rate)%
= 1.0 (2 800)(10%) = 280 tons > 240 tons
Points scored for RCA under 3-1(a)(ii) = 2 points
WCS (tons) = 0.7(tons/m3) X (concrete vol in m3) X (WCS replacement rate)%

= 0.7 (2 800)(10%) = 196 tons > 120 tons


Points scored for WCS under 3-1(a)(ii) = 1 point
Therefore, total points scored for 3-1(a) = 1(for green cement) + 2(for RCA)
+ 1(for WCS) = 4 points

Worked
Example
3-1(b)

Proposed development comprises a 30 storey office block with two basement


carparks and the following details :
Concrete usage for the superstructure

Constructed floor areas

For 1st storey


= 1035.5 m3
nd
th
From 2 to 30 storey = 27 060 m3
(including roof level)

= 2200 m2
For 1st storey
nd
th
From 2 to 30 storey = 57798 m2
(including roof level)

Therefore,
Total concrete usage = 28 095.5 m3

Therefore,
Total constructed floor areas = 59998 m2

Note : The concrete usage for foundation and two basements are not required to be
included.
28095.5
Concrete Usage Index CUI =
= 0.47 m3/m2
Refer to the
59998
following
Based on the point allocation shown in Table 3-1(b)
Table 3-1(b)
for more
3
2
3
2
details
CUI of 0.47 m /m < 0.5 m /m

Therefore, point scored = 3 points

169

Worked
Example
3-1(b)
Contd

Table 3-1(b) Concrete Usage Index


COMPUTATION OF CONCRETE USAGE INDEX
Project Reference No.: AXXXX-00001-2007

NON-RESIDENTIAL BLDG

Total no. of storey for the project: 30

Block No : A
Thickness (mm) or
size (mm x mm)

Volume of
concrete (m3)

Remark *

1.1 Columns

300x300, 400x400

120

Precast

1.2 Beams

300x500, 200x500

320

Precast

200,225,250

400

Post
tensioned

175

93.5

Precast

Structural System
1

1st storey

1.3 Slabs
1.4 Staircases
1.5 Suspended structures like
planter boxes, bay windows,
ledges etc

_
0

_
1.6 Parapets

_
0

1.7 External walls loadbearing walls

Nil

1.8 External walls


non-loadbearing walls

125

22

1.9 Internal walls


loadbearing walls

200

55

RC
RC

1.10 Internal walls nonloadbearing walls

100

1.11 Others (kerbs, ramps,


services risers, etc)

Not required

10
15

Total volume of concrete for this storey (m3)

RC
1035.5

Total constructed floor area for this storey (m2)


2

Light
weight
concrete

2200

Typical floor layout


2.1 Columns

300x300, 400x400

115

Precast

2.2 Beams

300x500, 200x500

301.5

Precast

200,225,250

320

Post
tensioned

2.4 Staircases

175

93.5

Precast

2.5 Suspended structures like


planter boxes, bay windows,
ledges etc

Nil

2.6 Parapets

Nil

2.7 External walls loadbearing walls

Nil

2.8 External walls


non-loadbearing walls

125

22

2.3 Slabs

_
_
_

170

RC

Worked
Example
3-1(b)
Contd

COMPUTATION OF CONCRETE USAGE INDEX


Project Reference No.: AXXXX-00001-2007

NON-RESIDENTIAL BLDG

Total no. of storey for the project: 30

Block No : A
Volume of
3
concrete (m )

Remark *

250,300

50

RC

2.10.Internal walls nonloadbearing walls

Nil

2.11 Others (kerbs, ramps,


services risers etc)

Nil

Structural System
2

Thickness (mm) or
size (mm x mm)

2nd storey to 30th storey ( Typical floor layout)


2.9 Internal walls
loadbearing walls

Volume of concrete for one storey (m3)


Constructed floor area for one storey

902
1926.6

Total volume of concrete for 2nd to 30th storey


(including roof level)

902 X 30 = 27060

Total constructed floor area for 2nd to 30th storey (m2)


(including roof level)
Total volume of concrete for this project (m3)
Total constructed floor area for this project (m2)
Concrete Usage Index (CUI in m3/m2)

1926.6 x 30 = 57798
28095.5
59998
0.47

*To indicate if the structural elements is of precast concrete, post-tensioned concrete, high
strength concrete (> Grade 60 ) or reinforced concrete (RC) under the Remarks column
Important notes : The quantities of the concrete for all the structural and non-structural
elements for each floor level are computed. All the elements listed in the table such as
columns, beams, slabs, suspended structures (like planter boxes, bay windows and ledges
etc) , parapets, walls and others (service risers, kerbs, ramps etc) are to be included. The
concrete usages for foundation and basement works are excluded in CUI computation.

171

NRB 3-2 SUSTAINABLE PRODUCTS

Objectives

Encourage the use of products that are environmentally friendly and sustainable.

Applicability

Applicable to non-structural and architectural building components.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

Up to 8 points are allocated to encourage the use of appropriate environmentally


friendly products that are certified by approved local certification body. The
products used should have considerably contributions in the overall environmental
sustainability standard of the development. Points scored will be based on the
weightage, extent of coverage and impact.
The weightage given will be based on the extent of environmental friendliness as
determined by the approved local certification body and are subject to BCAs
evaluation.
Extent of Environmental
Friendliness of Products

Weightage for Point


Allocation

Good

0.5

Very Good

1.5

Excellent

The use of environmental friendly products used for the main building elements or
functional spaces will be considered as high impact (1 point) if the quantities used
by percentage are more than 50% (i.e. extent of coverage) as compared to the total
quantities used for the same intended purpose. Items that do not meet the
minimum coverage or are used in other common areas, external works etc will be
considered as low impact (0.5 point).
Note : The point allocated for low volatile organic compound (VOC) paints and adhesives
certified by approved local certification body can be found in NRB 4-3 and hence shall not
be included in the scoring for NRB 3-2.

Documentary
Evidences

Extracts from the tender specification and drawings showing the requirements

to incorporate the environmental friendly products that are certified with


approved local certification body;
Certification details from approved local certification body such as the material

certification standards, rating and product reference; and


Technical product information and delivery records.

References

For more info on product certification, refer to


http://www.sgbc.sg/green-certifications/product-certifications/
http://www.greenlabel.sg/

172

Worked
Example
3-2(i)

1. Determine if the environmental friendly products selected are certified with


approved certification body and the product rating.
2. Check if the products used are meant for main building elements or functional
spaces and determine the quantities used for these products as compared to
the total quantities required for the same intended purpose or applicable areas.
It can be considered as high impact if the quantities of the products used
constitute more than 50% of the total requirement. Examples are internal
drywall partitions in every functional space unit, carpets for office spaces etc for
more than 50% of the total quantities or applicable areas. If the selected
products are used for less than 50% of the total quantities or applicable areas, it
would be considered as low impact.
3. Products that are meant for common areas and external works such as toilets,
lobbies and landscaping areas and are adopted in more than 50% of the
applicable areas would be considered as low impact.
Example of a proposed development using the following products that are rated
to be Good by the approved local certification body.
Products and Extent of
coverage

With
approved
certification

Points
allocated
based on
impact (A)

Weightage
based on
rating (B)

Points
scored
(AxB)

(a)

Carpets for all


office spaces

Yes

0.5

0.5

(b)

Panel boards as
internal partition
for more than 50%
of office spaces

Yes

0.5

0.5

(c)

Precast concrete
road kerbs

Yes

0.5

0.5

0.25

Points scored for 3-2 (i) = 0.5+0.5+0.25 = 1.25 points


Worked
Example
3-2(ii)

Note : Certain products have more environmentally friendly features than others. Other than
recycled materials, they may have added features like low VOC assembly or manufactured
with resource efficient processes, durability etc that will render the products more
environmental friendly than others. If the certified products selected are more environmental
friendly and are given a better rating by the approved local certification body, a higher
weightage can be considered in point scoring.

Example of a proposed development with the following provisions:


(a) Use of carpets for all office spaces. Product is not certified.
(b) Use of panel boards as internal partitions for more than 50% of the office
spaces and the product is rated to be Very Good by the approved
certification body.
(c) Precast concrete road kerbs. Product is rated as Good by approved local
certification body.

173

Worked
Example
3-2(ii)
Contd

(d) Use of roof waterproofing coating. Product is rated as Very Good by


approved local certification body.
(e) Use of wooden doors for all areas.
approved local certification body.
Products and
Extent of coverage

Product is rated as Excellent by

With
approved
certification

Points
allocated
based on
impact (A)

Weightage
based on
rating (B)

Points
scored
(AxB)

(a)

Carpets for all


office spaces

No

NA

NA

(b)

Panel boards as
internal partition
for more than 50%
of office spaces

Yes

1.5

1.5

(c)

Precast road
kerbs

Yes

0.5

0.5

0.25

(d)

Roof
waterproofing

Yes

0.5

1.5

0.75

(e)

Wooden doors for


all areas

Yes

Therefore, points scored for 3-2 (ii) = 1.5 +0.25+0.75+2 = 4.5 points

174

NRB 3-3 GREENERY PROVISION

Objectives

Encourage greater use of greenery and restoration of existing trees to reduce heat
island effect.

Applicability

Applicable to building developments with landscaping areas.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

3-3(a) Up to 6 points can be scored for the provision of greenery within the
developments including roof top/ sky garden and green roof.
Green Plot Ratio (GnPR) is calculated by considering the 3D volume
covered by plants using the following Leaf Area Index (LAI)
Plant
group
LAI

Area

Trees

Palms

Shrubs &
Groundcover

Turf

Open Canopy = 2.5


Intermediate Canopy = 3.0
Dense Canopy = 4.0

Solitary = 2.5
Cluster = 4.0

Monocot = 3.5
Dicot = 4.5

Turf = 2.0

All = 60 m2

Solitary = 20 m2
Cluster = 17 m2

Planted area

Planted
area

Green Plot Ratio (GnPR) = Total Leaf Area / Site Area


GnPR
0.5 to < 1.0
1.0 to < 1.5
1.5 to < 3.0
3.0 to < 3.5
3.5 to < 4.0
4.0

Points Allocation
1
2
3
4
5
6
175

3-3(b) 1 point for restoration, conservation or relocation of existing trees on site.


3-3(c) 1 point for the use of compost recycled from horticulture waste.

Documentary
Evidences

For 3-3(a)
Plan layouts showing the site area as well as the greenery that is provided
within the development (including a listing of the number of trees, palms,
shrubs, turf and the sub category and LAI values); and
Calculation showing the extent of the greenery provision in the prescribed
tabulated format as in worked example 3-3(a).
For 3-3(b)
Site layouts showing the existing and final locations (where applicable) and
number of the trees to be restored or conserved or relocated.
For 3-3(c)
Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirements to use compost
recycled from horticulture waste.

Exceptions

TREES AND PALMS SPACING (CENTRE-TO-CENTRE)


(a) If the selected trees and palms are to be planted at 2m from trunk-to-trunk as
illustrated below, the leaf area shall be calculated as the product of LAI value and
planted area (in m2).
2m

COLUMNAR TREES
(b) For trees that have tight, columnar crowns, the canopy area of 12 m2 is to be
adopted for calculation of leaf area. These species include, but not limited to the
following :
Garcinia cymosa forma pendula
Garcinia subelliptica
Polyalthia longifolia
Carallia brachiata
. Gnetum gnemon
References

The plant species sub categories and its LAI values may be obtained from the
online website: http://florafaunaweb.nparks.gov.sg/

176

Worked
Example
3-3(a)

(1) Determine the number of trees, palms and the areas for shrub and turfs and
other greenery area
(2) The Leaf Area Index (LAI) of the individual plant species and its canopy area are
predetermined design parameters applicable for all developments.
(3) The plant species sub categories and its LAI values can be obtained from the
online website: http://florafaunaweb.nparks.gov.sg/ (see example below) by
searching the common / scientific names of the plants.
(4) Compute the green areas as shown in the Table 3-3(a) below
Table 3-3(a) Calculation of the Green Plot Ratio
Category

(A)

(B)

(C)

(A) x (B) x (C)

LAI value

Canopy
Area

Qty/ Planted
Area

Leaf Area

Open Canopy

2.5

60 m2

0 no.

Intermediate
Canopy

3.0

60 m2

8 no.

1440

Dense Canopy

4.0

60 m2

12 no.

2880

Intermediate
columnar canopy *

3.0

12 m2

5 no.

180

Solitary

2.5

20 m2

10 no.

500

Solitary

2.5

NA

20 m2

50

Cluster

4.0

17 m2

5 no.

340

Monocot

3.5

NA

0 m2

Dicot

4.5

NA

20 m2

90

Turf (m2)

Turf

2.0

NA

90 m2

180

Vertical
2
Greenery (m )

2.0

NA

10 m2

20

Trees (no.)

Palms
2
(no.or m )

Sub category

(trunk-to trunk 5m )

Shrubs (m2)

Note : * refer to the exceptions

Total Leaf Area :

5680

Note: Green roof landscaping would be calculated as per illustrated above


Assume site area is 4000m2
Green Plot Ratio (GnPR) = total leaf area / site area
= 5680 / 4000 = 1.42 < 1.5
where GnPR = 1 to < 1.5
Therefore, points scored for 3-3(a) = 2 points

177

NRB 3-4 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PRACTICE

Objectives

Encourage the adoption of environmental friendly practices during construction and


building operation.

Applicability

Generally applicable to all building developments.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

3-4(a) 1 point can be scored if effective implementation of environmental friendly


programmes including monitoring and setting targets to minimise energy
use, water use and construction waste are in place.
3-4(b) 1 point can be scored if main builder has good track records in the adoption
of sustainable, environmentally friendly and considerate practices during
construction such as the Green and Gracious Builder Award.
3-4(c) 1 point can be scored if the building quality is assessed under the
Construction Quality Assessment System (CONQUAS).
3-4(d) Up to 1 point if the developer, main builder, M & E consultant and architect
are ISO 14000 certified. 0.25 point is allocated for each firm that is certified.
3-4(e) Up to 1 point if the project team comprises one Certified Green Mark
Manager (GMM)(0.5 point), one Certified Green Mark Facility Manager
(GMFM)(0.5 point) or one Certified Green Mark Professional (GMP)(1 point).
3-4(f) 1 point can be scored for the provision of building users guide with details of
the environmental friendly facilities and features within the building and their
uses in achieving the intended environment performance during building
operation.
3-4(g) 1 point can be scored for the provision of facilities or recycling bins for
collection and storage of different recyclable waste such as paper, glass,
plastic etc.

Documentary
Evidences

For 3-4(a)
Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirements for builder to
provide and implement environmental friendly programmes to minimise energy
use, water use and construction waste; and
Details of the environmental friendly programmes implemented.
For 3-4(b)
A certified true copy of the main builders Green and Gracious Builder Award; or
Details of track records in the adoption of sustainable, environmentally friendly
and considerate practices during construction.
For 3-4(c)
Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirement to adopt
CONQUAS.

178

For 3-4(d)
A certified true copy of the ISO 14000 certificate of developer, main contractor,
M & E consultant and architect where applicable.
For 3-4(e)
A certified true copy of the certificate of Green Mark Manager or Green Mark
Facility Manager and Green Mark Professional where applicable and a
confirmation of their involvement and contribution in the project.
For 3-4(f)
A copy of the building users guide containing the details of the environmental
friendly facilities and features within the building and their uses in achieving the
intended environment performance during building operation.
For 3-4(g)
Plan layout showing the location of the recycling bins for collection and storage
of different recyclable waste.

References

179

NRB 3-5 GREEN TRANSPORT

Objectives

Promote environmental friendly transport options and facilities to reduce pollution


from individual car use.

Applicability

Generally applicable to all building developments.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

3-5(a) 1 point can be scored for design that provides good access (< 500m walking
distance) to public transport networks such as MRT/LRT stations and bus
stops.
3-5(b) 1 point can be scored for provision of covered walkway to facilitate
connectivity and use of public transport.
3-5(c) 1 point can be scored for provision of electric vehicle charging stations and
priority parking lots within the development. (Minimum provision : 1 charging
station and priority parking lot for every 100 carpark lots, round up to the
nearest hundreds) (Cap at 5 charging stations and priority parking lots).
3-5(d) Up to 1 point can be scored for the provision of covered/sheltered bicycles
parking lots with adequate shower facilities (Minimum provision of 10 bicycle
parking lots; Cap at 50 bicycle parking lots where applicable) :
o 1 point if the number of bicycles parking lots is at least equivalent to
3% of Gross Floor Areas (GFA)/10
o 0.5 point if the number of bicycles parking lots is at least equivalent to
1.5% of GFA/10

Documentary
Evidences

For 3-5(a)
Site layout plan in the context of the surrounding area showing the location of
the development site and the location of the MRT/LRT stations and bus stops.
For 3-5(b)
Site layout plan showing the connection of covered walkway from the
development to the MRT/LRT stations or bus stops.
Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirement to provide covered
walkway
For 3-5(c)
Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirement to provide electric.
vehicle charging stations..
For 3-5(d)
Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirement to provide
covered/sheltered bicycles parking lots, shower and changing facilities for the
development and the quantity and location of bicycle lots provided.

References

180

Worked
Example

Example 1
A proposed building development with Gross Floor Areas (GFA) of 5,000 m2.

3-5(d)
Check on the minimum requirement
For point scoring of 1 point :
Minimum number of bicycle parking lots = 3% x 5000
(with adequate shower facilities) (1 point)
10

= 15 lots

For point scoring of 0.5 point:


Minimum number of bicycle parking lots = 1.5% x 5000
(with adequate shower facilities) (0.5 point)
10

~ 8 lots

Note : There is a minimum number of 10 bicycle parking lots


Therefore
1 point will be scored if the number of bicycles parking lots provided is 20 lots
(with adequate shower facilities).
0.5 point will be scored if the number of bicycles parking lots provided is 10 lots
(with adequate shower facilities).
Example 2
A proposed building development with Gross Floor Areas (GFA) of 40,000 m2
Minimum number of bicycle parking lots = 3% x 40000
(with adequate shower facilities) (1 point)
10
Minimum number of bicycle parking lots = 1.5% x 40000
(with adequate shower facilities) (0.5 point)
10

= 120 lots
= 60 lots

1 point will be scored if the number of bicycles parking lots provided is 50 lots
(with adequate shower facilities).
Note : There is a cap at 50 bicycles parking lots

181

NRB 3-6 REFRIGERANTS

Objectives

Reduce the potential damage to the ozone layer and the increase in global warming
caused by the release of ozone depleting substances and greenhouse gases.

Applicability

Generally applicable to all building developments with air-conditioning systems.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

3-6(a) 1 point can be scored for the use of refrigerants with ozone depleting
potential(ODP) of zero or with global warming potential (GWP) of less than
100.
3-6(b) 1 point can be scored for the use of refrigerant leak detection system at
critical areas of plant rooms containing chillers and other equipments with
refrigerants.

Documentary
Evidences

For 3-6(a)
Extracts from the tender specification showing the requirement for all
refrigerants to have an ODP of zero or GWP of less than 100.
For 3-6(b)
Extracts from tender specification showing the requirement to incorporate a
refrigerant leak detection system.

References

182

NRB 3-7 STORMWATER MANAGEMENT

Objectives

Encourage the treatment of stormwater runoff through provision of infiltration or


design features before discharge to public drains.

Applicability

Generally applicable to all building developments.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

Up to 3 points can be scored for the treatment of stormwater runoff.

3 points for treatment of run-off from more than 35% of total site area or
paved area

2 points for treatment of run-off from more than 10% to up to 35% of total
site area

1 point for treatment of run-off from up to 10% of total site area

Note:
(1) The treatment of stormwater runoff shall be through provision of infiltration
features or design features as recommended in PUBs ABC Water design
Guidelines.
(2) Points can be scored if the treatment of run-off covers more than 35% of total
paved area of the site. If the percentage of total paved area is less than 35%,
points can only be scored based on total site area.

Documentary
Evidences

Site layout plans indicating the total site area, total paved area within the site as

well as the total catchment areas where runoff are treated through the provision
of ABC Waters design features. Other information such as the total paved
areas within the catchment areas, treatment areas and the hydraulic retention
time of the design features are to be included where applicable.
Drainage plan, schematic plan, location plan and section details of ABC Waters

Design features such as the specification of filtration layer, transition layer and
drainage layer, sub-soil drainage system, overflow arrangement, plant list etc.
Relevant design calculations and simulation/ modeling results are to be
provided where applicable.
References

Public Utilities Board (PUB), Singapore publication on


- ABC Waters Design Guidelines
- Engineering Procedure for ABC Waters Design Features
For more information about ABC Waters Design Guidelines, refer to
http://www.pub.gov.sg/abcwaters/abcwatersdesignguidelines/Pages/ABCDesignGuidelines.aspx

183

Worked
Example
3-7

A development has a site area of 1000 m2 that includes 500 m2 paved area. It was
planned that 300 m2 of the site area would be treated through a bio-retention system
designed according to PUBs ABC Waters design guidelines.
Based on total site area
Percentage of run-off being treated = 300/1000 x 100% = 30%
Points scored = 2 points
Based on paved area
If 200 m2 out of the 300m2 catchment area treated, was paved
Percentage of run-off being treated = 200/500 x 100% = 40%
Points scored = 3 points
Therefore, points scored for 3-7 = 3 points

184

(II) Other Green Requirements


Part 4 Indoor
Environmental
Quality

NRB 4-1
NRB 4-2
NRB 4-3
NRB 4-4
NRB 4-5

Thermal Comfort
Noise Level
Indoor Air Pollutants
Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management
High Frequency Ballasts

NRB 4-1 THERMAL COMFORT

Objectives

Recognise buildings that are designed with good thermal comfort.

Applicability

Generally applicable to all building developments with air-conditioning systems.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

2 points can be scored if the air-conditioning systems are designed to allow for
cooling load variations due to fluctuations in ambient air temperature and to
maintain consistent indoor conditions for thermal comfort.
Indoor temp between 24 C to 26 C
Relative Humidity < 65%

Documentary
Evidences

Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirement to design the airconditioning systems that would provide consistent indoor conditions for thermal
comfort as stated in the above requirement.

References

186

NRB 4-2 NOISE LEVEL

Objectives

Recognise buildings that are designed to control and keep the background noise in
occupied spaces at levels appropriate to the intended use of the spaces.

Applicability

Generally applicable to all building developments.

Baseline
Standard

SS 553 Code of Practice for Air-Conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation in


Buildings.

Requirements

1 point can be scored if the occupied spaces in buildings are designed with the
recommended ambient sound levels stated in SS 553.

Documentary
Evidences

Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirement to design the


occupied space with the ambient sound levels to the recommendation stated in
SS 553 ; and

Detailed analysis, calculations and/or measurements to ensure that the


designed ambient sound levels are met.

References

187

NRB 4-3 INDOOR AIR POLLUTANTS

Objectives

Minimise airborne contaminants, mainly from inside sources to promote a healthy


indoor environment.

Applicability

Generally applicable to all building developments.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

4-3(a) 1 point can be scored for the use of low volatile organic compounds (VOC)
paints certified under approved local certification body for at least 90% of
the internal wall areas.
4-3(b) 1 point can be scored for the use of adhesives certified by approved local
certification body for at least 90% of the applicable building works or areas.

Documentary
Evidences

For 4-3(a)
Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirement to use low VOC
paints that are certified by approved local certification body.

Technical Product Information

For 4-3(b)
Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirement to use adhesive
with low emission formaldehyde and are certified under approved local
certification body.

References

Technical Product Information

188

NRB 4-4 INDOOR AIR QUALITY (IAQ) MANAGEMENT

Objectives

Ensure building ventilation systems are designed and installed to provide


acceptable IAQ under normal operating conditions.

Applicability

Applicable to air-conditioned buildings.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

4-4(a) 1 point can be scored for the provision of filtration media and differential
pressure monitoring equipment in Air Handling Units (AHU) in accordance
with the guidelines given in SS 554: Clause 4.3.4.5 & Annex E.
4-4(b) 1 point can be scored for implementing effective IAQ management plan to
ensure that building ventilation systems are clean and free from residuals
left over from construction activities. Internal surface condition tests for
ACMV system are to be included. Refer to guidelines given in SS554:
Clause 4.6 & Annex F.

Documentary
Evidences

For 4-4(a)

Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirement of the filter media
and pressure monitoring equipment;

Technical product information which should include the minimum efficiency


reporting value (MERV) parameters of the filters; and

Technical product information of the differential pressure monitoring equipment.

For 4-4(b)

Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirement for builder to


provide and implement effective IAQ management and the details of the
management plan; and

Test result of the internal surface condition testing for ACMV systems

References

189

NRB 4-5 HIGH FREQUENCY BALLASTS

Objectives

Encourage the use of high frequency ballasts in fluorescent luminaries to improve


the workplace lighting quality.

Applicability

Generally applicable to workplace such as offices, classrooms and training rooms


and the like.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

2 points can be scored for the use of high frequency ballasts in the fluorescent
luminaries if it is adopted in at least 90% of the applicable areas that are served by
fluorescent luminaries.

Documentary
Evidences

A summary sheet listing all fluorescent luminaries used for the developments
and those with high frequency ballasts; and

Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirement to have high


frequency ballasts are to be used in all fluorescent luminaries listed.

References

190

(II) Other Green Requirements


Part 5 Other Green
Features

NRB 5-1

Green Features and Innovations

NRB 5-1 OTHER GREEN FEATURES

Objectives

Encourage the use of green features that are innovative and have positive
environmental impact on water efficiency, environmental protection and indoor
environmental quality of the buildings.

Applicability

Generally applicable to all building developments.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

Up to 7 points are awarded for the use of the following green features depending
on their potential environmental benefits or reduced environmental impacts.
Water Efficiency
(i) Use of self cleaning faade system
2 points for more than 75% of the applicable facade areas
1 point for more than 50% of the applicable facade areas
0.5 point for at least 25% of the applicable facade areas

(ii) Use of grey water recycling system


2 points for all blocks of the development
1 point for at least one block of the development

(iii) Recycling of AHU condensate


1 point for more than 75% of the AHU condensate
0.5 point for at least 50% of the AHU condensate

(iv) Provision of system to recycle surface runoff from the vertical green wall and
sky garden
1 point for at least 25% of the green areas
0.5 point for less than 25% of the green areas

(v) 0.5 point for the use of air-cooled variable refrigerant flow (VRF) system as the
main air-conditioning system.
Environmental Protection
(i) Provision of green roof and roof top garden
1 point for more than 50% of the roof areas
0.5 point for at least 25% of the roof areas

(ii) Provision of vertical greening


1 point for more than 50% of the applicable wall areas
0.5 point for at least 25% of the applicable wall areas

(iii) 1 point for the provision of double refuse chutes for separating recyclable from
non-recyclable waste.
(iv) 0.5 point for the use of non-chemical termite treatment system.
(v) 0.5 point for the provision of at least 5 nos. of compost bins to recycle organic
waste.

192

(vi) 0.5 point for the use of non-chemical water treatment system for swimming
pools.
(vii) Conservation of existing building structure or building envelopes (by areas).
2 points for conserving more than 50% of the existing structure or building
envelope
1 point for conserving at least 25% of the existing structure or building envelope

(viii) Buildable design with developments buildability scores (BScore) above the
prevailing minimum requirement (Refer to COP on Buildable Design).
1 point for BScore > 5 points above minimum requirement
0.5 point for BScore > 3 to 5 points above minimum requirement

(ix) Calculation of carbon footprint of the development comprising energy usage


data of production and on-site construction of building materials listed in the
prescribed form.
1 point for the submission of complete carbon footprint calculation for all building
materials listed and in the prescribed format or a complete carbon footprint report
of the development prepared by an independent carbon consultant
0.5 point for the submission of carbon footprint calculation for any four building
materials listed and in the prescribed format

(x)

1 point for the computation of Concrete Usage Index (CUI) of the building
development.

(xi) Adoption of demolition protocol to maximise resource recovery of demolition


materials for reuse or recycling.
2 points for recovery rate of more than 35% crushed concrete waste to be sent to
the approved recyclers with proper facilities
1 point for recovery rate of at least 20% crushed concrete waste to be sent to the
approved recyclers with proper facilities
Refer to details at http://www.bca.gov.sg/SustainableConstruction/sc_demolition.html for compliance.

Indoor Air Quality


(i) 1 point for the use of pneumatic waste collection system.
(ii) 0.5 point for the use of Ultraviolet light-C band (UV) emitters in all air handling
units (AHUs) to improve indoor air quality.
Others
(i) 0.5 point for the use of siphonic rainwater discharge system at roof.
(ii) 0.5 point for the provision of carpark guidance system.
Important notes : For features that are not listed above, the QP is required to submit the
details showing the positive environmental impacts, possible savings and benefits of the
proposed features to BCA for assessment.

Documentary
Evidences

Extracts of the tender specification showing the provision of the specific green
features used and the extent of implementation where applicable;

Technical product information (including drawings and supporting documents)


of the green features;

A summary sheet listing the breakdown and the extent of implementation as


well as the total requirements for the same intended purpose for the specific
green features used; and

193

Documentary
Evidences

Quantified evidences on the potential environmental benefits that the features


can bring to the development.

Contd

The carbon footprint calculation to be submitted in the following prescribed form


and format.

References

Computation of Concrete Usage Index (CUI) and supporting documents as


stated under Part 3 NRB 3-1(b)

Demolition audit form showing the summary of the total and actual quantity of
concrete waste and delivery records or receipts from approved recycling firm.

194

Annex B-3
SCORING METHODOLOGY & DOCUMENTATION

Non-Residential Building Criteria


Transit Station

(I) Energy Related Requirements


Part 1 Energy Efficiency

ST 1-1
ST 1-2
ST 1-3
ST 1-4
ST 1-5

Environmental Control Systems


Lighting Systems
Electrical Services
Lifts and Escalators
Energy Efficient Features

ST 1-1 ENVIROMENTAL CONTROL SYSTEMS


Objectives

Encourage the use of better energy efficient air-conditioned equipments and


mechanical ventilation system to minimise energy consumption.

Applicability

1-1(a) to (c) Scope covers all air-conditioned equipments for the buildings as listed:

Air Handling Units (AHUs)


Fan Coil Units (FCUs)
Direct-Expansion (DX) Unitary Air-Conditioners/

Chillers
Chilled-Water Pumps
Condenser Water Pumps
Cooling Towers

Condensing Units which include single-split units,


multi-spilt units and variable refrigerant flow (VRF)
system

1-1(d) Applicable to mechanical ventilation fans provided in non air-conditioning


spaces.
Baseline
Standard

1-1(a) Water Cooled Chilled-Water Plant


Peak Building Cooling Load

Baseline
Minimum Design System
Efficiency (DSE) for Central
Chilled Water Plant Efficiency

500 RT

300 RT to
< 500 RT

< 300RT

0.70 kW/RT

0.80 kW/RT

0.85 kW/RT

Chiller - Refer Table 2 of SS 530.


Chilled and condenser water pump efficiency - Refer to Clause 10.5.1.1 in
SS 553 which states that :
The pump power limitation for chilled water systems shall be 349 kW/m3/s
The pump power limitation for condensing water systems shall be 301 kW/m3/s

Cooling tower performance at the rating condition stated in Table 3 of SS530.


Rating condition is as follows : 35C Entering water
29C Leaving water
24C Wet bulb outdoor air
Propeller and axial fan cooling tower :
With heat rejected from every 3.23 L/s of condenser water per 1 kW of fan
power rating :
Cooling tower performance

1 kW / 3.23 L/s
0.310 kW/ L/s

Centrifugal fan cooling tower :


With heat rejected from every 1.7 L/s of condenser water per 1 kW of fan
power rating :
Cooling tower performance

1 kW/ 1.7 L/s


0.588 kW/ L/s

197

Baseline
Standard

1-1(b) Air Distribution System


Option 1 Fan System Motor Nameplate Power

Contd

Baseline : SS553:2009 Table 2 Fan power limitation and as prescribed below :


Baseline

Allowable Motor Nameplate Power

Air Distribution System Type


Fan systems with motor
nameplate power 4kW

(kW/m3/s)

(W/CMH)

Air Handling Units (AHUs)


/Fan Coil Units (FCUs)
(Constant Volume)

1.7

0.47

Air Handling Units (AHUs)


/Fan Coil Units (FCUs)
(Variable Volume)

2.4

0.67

Fan systems with nameplate


motor power < 4 kW

No baseline

Option 2 Fan System Input Power


Baseline : ASHRAE 90.1 Clause 6.5.3.1 and as prescribed below :
Baseline

Allowable Fan System Input Power

Air Distribution System Type


Fan systems with motor
nameplate power 4kW

(kW/m3/s)

(W/CMH)

Air Handling Units (AHUs)


/Fan Coil Units (FCUs)
(Constant Volume)

1.5

0.42

Air Handling Units (AHUs)


/Fan Coil Units (FCUs)
(Variable Volume)

2.1

0.58

Fan systems with motor


nameplate power < 4 kW

0.6

0.17

* Applicable

pressure drop adjustments can be considered based on ASHRAE 90.1


Table 6.5.3.1.1B and are subject to BCAs evaluation

1-1(c) Unitary Air-Conditioners and Condensing Units:


Peak Building Cooling Load

Baseline
Minimum Design System Efficiency (DSE)
for Unitary Air-Conditioners

500 RT

< 500 RT

0.80 kW/RT

0.90 kW/RT

Refer to the minimum efficiency requirement as stated in Table 1 of SS 530.

198

Baseline
Standard

1-1(d) Mechanical Ventilation Systems


Option 1 Fan System Motor Nameplate Power

Contd

Baseline : SS553:2009 Table 8 Fan power limitation and as prescribed below :


Baseline

Allowable Motor Nameplate Power

Air Distribution System Type


Fan systems with motor
nameplate power 4kW

(kW/m3/s)

(W/CMH)

1.7

0.47

Air Handling Units (AHUs)


/Fan Coil Units (FCUs)
(Constant Volume)
Fan systems with nameplate
motor power < 4 kW

No baseline

Option 2 Fan System Input Power


Baseline : ASHRAE 90.1: 2010 Clause 6.5.3.1 and as prescribed below :
Baseline

Allowable Fan System Input Power*

Air Distribution System Type


Fan systems with motor
nameplate power 4kW

(kW/m3/s)

(W/CMH)

Air Handling Units (AHUs)


/Fan Coil Units (FCUs)
(Constant Volume)

1.5

0.42

Fan systems with motor


nameplate motor power < 4 kW

0.6

0.17

* Applicable pressure drop adjustments can be considered based on ASHRAE 90.1

Table 6.5.3.1.1B and are subject to BCAs evaluation

Requirements

1-1(a) Water Cooled Chilled-Water Plant (Up to 20 points)


Peak building cooling load 500 RT
15 points for meeting the prescribed chilled-water plant efficiency of 0.7 kW/RT.
0.25 point for every percentage improvement in the chilled-water plant efficiency
over the baseline.
Points scored = 15 + 0.25 x (% improvement)
Peak building cooling load 300 RT and < 500 RT

12 points for meeting the prescribed chilled-water plant efficiency of 0.80 kW/RT.
0.45 point for every percentage improvement in the chilled-water plant efficiency
over the baseline.
Points scored = 12 + 0.45 x (% improvement)

199

Requirements
Contd

Peak building cooling load < 300RT


7 points for meeting the prescribed chilled-water plant efficiency of 0.85 kW/RT.
0.6 point for every percentage improvement in the chilled-water plant efficiency
over the baseline.
Points scored = 7 + 0.6 x (% improvement)
1-1 (b) Air Distribution System (Up to 3 points)
0.15 point for every percentage improvement in the air distribution system
efficiency above the baseline.
Points scored = 0.15 x (% improvement)
1-1 (c) Unitary Air Conditioners (Up to 20 points)
Peak building cooling load 500 RT
12 points for meeting the prescribed air-conditioning system efficiency of 0.80 kW/RT.
1.3 points for every percentage improvement in the air-conditioning system efficiency over
the baseline.
Point scored = 12 + 1.3 x (% improvement)

Peak building cooling load < 500 RT


10 points for meeting the prescribed air-conditioning system efficiency of 0.90 kW/RT.
0.6 point for every percentage improvement in the air-conditioning system efficiency
over the baseline.
Points scored = 10 + 0.6 x (% improvement)

1-1 (d) Mechanical Ventilation System ( Up to 4 points)


0.2 point for every percentage improvement in the air-conditioning system
efficiency over the baseline.
Points scored = 0.2 x (% improvement)
Important notes :
(i) Where there is a combination of central chilled-water plant with unitary air-conditioned
system, the scoring will be based on the air-conditioning system with a larger
aggregate capacity.
(ii) For variable refrigerant flow (VRF) system, the efficiency should be based on normal
design dry-bulb temperature of 24 1C and relative humidity RH 65%.
(iii) Chillers should be sized based on the peak building cooling load and the cooling load
profile of the station. Depending on the load profile, various combinations of chillers
should be designed to match the operational building cooling load profile In other
words, the chiller plant efficiency at part-load condition should be considered in the
design to ensure that it also meets the required efficiency spelled out in ST 1-1 (a) to
1-1 (c) during operation. This is to ensure that the chillers are designed to operate
within the best efficiency range to optimise the chiller plant efficiency and energy
savings.
200

Documentary
Evidences

For 1-1(a), 1-1(b) and 1-1(c)


Detailed calculations of the Design System Efficiency (DSE) and overall

improvement in equipment efficiency of the air-conditioning plants/ units and


air distribution system in the prescribed tabulated formats as shown in the
worked examples Annex B-2 NRB 1-2(a), (b) and (c) and NRB 1-4(b);
Calculation and technical data of the designed system efficiency of chillers at
part load condition ;
Air-conditioning system information in prescribed format;
Calculation and technical data of the designed system efficiency of chillers /
unitary air-conditioners / condensing units VRF system at full load condition
and part load condition where applicable;
Plan layouts showing the installations of the central chilled-water plant

equipment meet the manufacturer's recommendations; and


Technical product information of all air-conditioning units and system.

For 1-1(d)
Plan layouts showing the mode of ventilation for units/ rooms of the station;
Mechanical ventilation design plan layouts;
Detailed calculation of fan static calculations and design air flow rate;
MV fan equipment schedule; and
Technical product information of all MV fans (to include the fan curve).
References

SS 530 Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency Standard for Building Services and
Equipment.
SS 553 Code of Practice for Air-Conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation in
Buildings.
SS 554 - Code of Practice for Indoor Air Quality for Air-Conditioned Buildings

Worked
Example

Refer to worked examples in Annex B-2 - NRB 1-2 (a),(b) and (c) and NRB 1-4 (b)

201

ST 1-2 LIGHTING SYSTEMS

Objectives

Encourage the use of better energy efficient lighting and daylighting to minimise
energy consumption from lighting usage while maintaining proper lighting level.

Applicability

Applicable to lighting provisions for the type of usage specified in the SS 530
Clause 7 Lighting power budget.

Baseline
Standard

1-2(a) Maximum lighting power budget stated in SS 530 - Code of Practice for
Energy Efficiency Standard for Building Services and Equipment and the following :
Type of Usage

Requirements

Maximum lighting
power budget (W/m2)

Public areas

10

corridors

10

Staircases

Plants rooms

10

Others

10

1-2(a) Artificial Lighting


Points scored based on the percentage of lighting power budget over baseline.
Percentage of lighting power
budget over the baseline

Points Allocation

80%

85%

4.5

90%

Display lighting and specialised lighting are to be included in the calculation of


lighting power budget.
The design service illuminance, lamp efficacies and the light output ratios of
luminaries shall be in accordance with SS 531 : Part 1 Code of Practice for
Lighting of Work Places Indoor or as approved.
1-2(b) Daylighting in public areas (that is concourse and platform areas) of
underground station.
0.5 point for every percentage of public areas utilising natural lighting. That is
Points scored = 0.5 x (% of public areas with daylighting)
Documentary
Evidences

For 1-2(a)
Lighting layout plan and schedules showing the numbers, locations and types of
lighting luminaries used;

Calculation of the proposed lighting power budget and the percentage of


maximum lighting power budget in the prescribed tabulated format as shown in
the worked example 1-2;

Tabulation showing the designed lux level and the minimum lux level based on
code requirement for the respective areas; and

Technical product information of the lighting luminaries used.


202

Documentary
Evidences
Contd
References

For 1-2(b)

Plan layouts showing the public areas with and without daylighting; and

Calculation of the percentage of public areas utilising natural lighting

SS 530 Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency Standard for Building Services and
Equipment.
SS 531 : Part 1 Code of Practice for Lighting of Work Places - Indoor

Worked
Example
1-2

(1) Determine the total power consumption based on the lighting layout design for
each area and light fitting types used.
(2) Calculate the total power consumption based on the maximum lighting power
budget stated in SS 530.
(3) Calculate the percentage of the lighting power budget over baseline.
Table 1-2-1: Total power consumption based on each fitting type
No. of
Fittings

Total power
consumption
based on
fitting type

(D)

(E)

[(C+D) x (E)]

2 x 28

500

29500

T5

2 x 28

125

7375

420

T8

2 x 28

40

2360

Plant Rooms

3500

T5

2 x 28

520

30680

Other areas

2500

T5

2 x 28

420

24780

Light
Fitting
Type

Power
Consumption
per fitting
(W)

Ballast
Loss

(A)

(B)

(C)

Public Areas

3300

T5

Corridors

980

Staircases

Description

Areas
(m2)

(W)

Total :

94695

Table 1-2-2 : Total power consumption based on design and SS530 requirements
Description

Areas
(m2)

Design Data

SS 530 Requirements

Total Power
Consumption
(by area)(W)

Design
Lighting Power
2
Budget (W/m )

Reference
Lighting Power
2
Budget (W/m )

Reference
Total Power
Consumption
(by area) (W)

(A)

(F)

(F/A)

(H)

(H x A)

Public Areas

3300

29500

8.94

10

33000

Corridors

980

7375

7.53

10

9800

Staircases

420

2360

5.62

2520

Plant Rooms

3500

30680

8.77

10

35000

Other areas

2500

24780

9.91

10

25000

Total :

94695

105320

Percentage of lighting budget over baseline = (F)] /(HxA) x 100%


= 94695/105320 x 100%
= 89.91% ~ 90%
Points scored

= 4 points
203

ST 1-3 ELECTRICAL SERVICES

Objectives

Encourage the provision of better energy efficient


sub-metering and related control for energy monitoring.

service

transformers,

Applicability

Applicable to the provision of service transformer and sub-metering.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

1-3(a) Up to 4 points can be scored for the provision of low-loss service


transformers with the following system performance.
Transformer capacity > 1 MVA
No load loss at rated voltage

Full load loss at rated voltage

Points
Allocation

< 0.25% of rated load

< 2.5% of rated load

< 0.2% of rated load

< 1.5% of rated load

Transformer capacity 1 MVA


No load loss at rated voltage

Full load loss at rated voltage

Points
Allocation

< 0.35% of rated load

< 2.5% of rated load

< 0.25% of rated load

< 1.5% of rated load

1-3 (b) Points can be scored for the provision of sub-metering for the following
systems :
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)

Lighting system for public areas


Air-conditioning system
Mechanical ventilation system for back of house plant rooms
Plumbing and sanitary systems
Lifts and escalators system
Electrical reticulation system for tenants.

3 points if all the system listed are equipped with sub-metering.


1.5 points if at least 50% of the systems listed are equipped with submetering
Documentary
Evidences

For 1-3(a)
Technical data and specification of the service transformers to be provided.
For 1-3 (b)
Plan layouts and details showing the provision of sub-metering of the various
systems.

References

204

ST 1-4 LIFTS AND ESCALATORS

Objectives

Encourage the use of energy efficient lifts and escalators.

Applicability

Applicable to all lifts and escalators in the development.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

0.5 point can be scored for the use of lifts with each of the following energy efficient
features. Points scored to be pro-rated based on the extent of coverage.
(i) Geared or other better energy efficient traction
(ii) AC variable voltage and variable frequency (VVVF) motor drive or equivalent
(iii) Sleep mode features or equivalent
0.5 point can be scored for the use of escalators with each of the following energy
efficient features. Points scored to be pro-rated based on the extent of coverage.
(i) Use of direct drive with gear box directly coupled to the main drive shaft
(ii) AC variable voltage and variable frequency (VVVF) motor drive
(iii) Standby speed mode
(iv) Standby stop mode

Documentary
Evidences

Extracts of the tender specification indicating the types of lifts, escalators and
related features used; and
Technical information of the lifts and escalators.

References

Worked
Example
1-4

Proposed station development has the following provision :


Lift types : Type L1 with VVVF motor drive and sleep mode features (5 nos.)
Escalator types : Type E1 with VVVF motor drive and standby speed mode (2 nos.)
Type E2 with VVVF motor drive and standby stop mode (3 nos.)
Points scored for lifts = 0.5 (for VVVF motor drive) + 0.5 (for sleep mode features)
= 1 point
As there are more than one escalator type with different energy efficient features,
the scoring will be prorated based on the number of escalator for each type.
Individual point scored for :
Escalator type E1 = 0.5 (for VVVF motor drive) + 0.5 (for standby speed mode ) = 1 point
Escalator type E2 = 0.5 (for VVVF motor drive) + 1 (for standby speed and stop mode )
= 1.5 points
Points scored for escalator = 1x (2/5) + 1.5 (3/5) = 1.3 point

205

ST 1-5 ENERGY EFFICIENT FEATURES

Objectives

Encourage the use of energy efficient practices and features which are innovative
and have positive environmental impact in terms of energy saving.

Applicability

Applicable to features that are not listed in other criteria under Part 1 Energy
Efficiency.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements Up to 7.5 points can be scored for the use of the following energy efficient features
based on their potential environmental benefits and extent of coverage.
(a) 1 point can be scored for each of the following features
(i) Auto-condenser tube cleaning system
(ii) Variable speed chilled water pumps
(iii) Automatic control devices to regulate the demand for mechanical
ventilation for staircases and corridors
(iv) Automatic control devices to regulate outdoor air supply to maintain the
carbon dioxide (CO2) concentration to below 700 ppm.
(v) Provision of permanent measuring instruments for monitoring of water
cooled chilled-water plant efficiency in accordance with the following
specification

The installed instrumentation shall have the capability to calculate a


resultant chilled-water plant efficiency within 5 % of the true value
and in accordance with ASHRAE Guide 22 and AHRI 550/590. The
methodology for determining the total uncertainty of measurement
shall be computed using the root-sum square formula as follows:

In deriving the measurement errors contributed by flow meters, an


additional 1% is to be included in the computation.

Location and installation of the measuring devices to meet


manufacturers recommendation.

Data acquisition system i.e. analog-to-digital or A/D converter used


shall have a minimum resolution of 16 bit. For example,
The specification for the A/D converter of the BTU meter should
have a minimum resolution of 16-bit. This applies to direct data
acquisition from the BTU meter.
For data acquisition using Building Management System
(BMS), the specification of the specific Digital Direct Controller
(DDC) connecting the temperature sensors should have a
minimum resolution of 16-bit.

All data logging with capability to trend at 1 minute sampling time


interval.
Flow meters are to be provided for chilled-water and condenser water
loop and shall be ultrasonic / full bore magnetic type or equivalent.

206

Temperature sensors are to be provided for chilled water and


condenser water loop and shall have an end-to-end measurement
uncertainty not exceeding 0.05 C over the entire measurement /
calibration range. All thermo-wells shall be installed in a manner which
ensures that the sensors can be in direct contact with fluid flow.
Provisions shall be made for each temperature measurement location
to have two spare thermo-wells located at both side of the
temperature sensor for verification of measurement accuracy.

Dedicated digital power meters are to be provided for each of the


following groups of equipment: chillers, chilled water pumps,
condenser water pumps and cooling towers.

(vi) Verification of central water cooled chilled-water plant instrumentation :


Heat balance substantiating test for water cooled chilled-water plant to
be computed in accordance with AHRI 550/590.
(b) For the use of energy efficient products that are certified by approved local
certification body, 0.5 point is allocated for each eligible product that has
considerable contribution in reducing the overall building consumption (Up
to 2 points).
(c) For energy efficient features that are not listed, the QP is required to submit
the details showing the positive environmental impacts and potential energy
savings of the proposed features to BCA for assessment and clearance
before submission. In general, the points scored will depend on the
potential energy savings. That is, 2 points for every 1% energy saving over
total building energy consumption.
Documentary
Evidences

Extracts of the tender specification showing the provision of the proposed

energy efficient features and the extent of implementation where applicable;


Technical product information and relevant certificates of the energy efficient

features used;
Calculation of the potential energy savings that could be reaped from the use

of these features; and


For instrumentation for monitoring central water cooled chilled-water plant

efficiency, the following documents are required :

Calculation of the overall uncertainty of measurement of the resultant chiller


plant efficiency in kW/RT to be within 5 % of the true value based on
instrumentation specifications/ calibration certificates;

Instruments calibration certificates from accredited laboratory and factory


calibration certificates from manufacturers;

Chiller plant room plan layouts showing the details of the instruments
locations;

Technical specification and product information of the flow meter proposed


and installed;

Technical specification and product information of the temperature sensors


proposed and installed;

Technical specification and product information of the power meter proposed


and installed;
207

Documentary
Evidences

Plan layouts showing the locations and the types of instrumentation used;

Contd

and
Summary of instruments, standards and measurement accuracy to be
presented in the following format and example :


ID

Description

Measurement/
Calibration range

End to End
Measurement
Uncertainty
(%)

Last
Calibration
Date

TT01

CHWS
Temperature

10K
Thermistor

0C - 40C

0.05C

10/10/2012

TT02

CHWR
Temperature

10K
Thermistor

0C - 40C

0.05C

10/10/2012

TT03

CWS
Temperature

10K
Thermistor

0C - 40C

0.05C

10/10/2012

TT04

CWR
Temperature

10K
Thermistor

0C - 40C

0.05C

10/10/2012

FM01

CHW Flow

Magnetic Full
Bore

30 l/s- 200 l/s

0.5%

10/10/2012

FM02

CW Flow

Magnetic Full
Bore
True RMS,
3 phase
True RMS,
3 phase

30 l/s- 200 l/s

0.5%

10/10/2012

60 600 kW

0.5%

10/10/2012

60 600 kW

0.5%

10/10/2012

References

Sensor Type

kW01

Chiller 1 Power

kW02

Chiller 2 Power

kW03

CHW Pump 1 &


2 Power

True RMS,
3 phase

20 200 kW

0.5%

10/10/2012

kW04

CW Pump 1 & 2
Power

True RMS,
3 phase

20 200 kW

0.5%

10/10/2012

kW05

CT 1 & 2 Power

True RMS,
3 phase

15 150 kW

0.5%

10/10/2012

SS 530 Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency Standard for Building Services and
Equipment.
SS 553 Code of Practice for Air-Conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation in
Buildings.
SS 554 - Code of Practice for Indoor Air Quality for Air-Conditioned Buildings
ASHRAE Guideline 22 Instrumentation for Monitoring Central Chilled-Water Plant
Efficiency
AHRI Standard 550/590 Performance Rating of Water- Chilling Packages Using
The Vapor Compression Cycle

Worked
Example

Refer to worked examples in Annex B-2 - NRB 1-2 (d) and (e)

208

(II) Other Green Requirements


Part 2 Water Efficiency

ST 2-1
ST 2-2
ST 2-3

Water Efficient Fittings


Water Usage Monitoring
Water Consumption of Cooling Towers

209

ST 2-1 WATER EFFICIENT FITTINGS

Objectives

Reduce the use of potable water by using water efficient fittings covered under
the Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme (WELS).

Applicability

Applicable to all water fittings covered by the WELS as follows:

Basin taps and mixers


Sink/bib taps and mixers
Urinals and urinal
Flush valves

Shower taps and mixers or showerheads


Flushing cisterns

Baseline
Standard

As specified under Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme (WELS).

Requirements

Points scored based on the number of fitting types with very good or excellent
WELS rating
WELS Rating

Water Efficiency

Number of fitting types

Points Allocation

Very Good
OR
Excellent

All fitting types

3 fitting types

At least 2 fitting types


l fitting types

Documentary
Evidences

Extracts of the tender specification showing all the water fitting provisions for
the development;
Water fitting schedules showing the numbers, types and the approved rating
of the proposed fittings in the prescribed tabulated format shown in the
worked example; and
Calculation showing the number of proposed water fittings that are under
Very Good or Excellent rating approved under WELS.

References

For more information about WELS, refer to


http://www.pub.gov.sg/wels/Pages /default.aspx

210

Worked
Example
2-1

Example of a water fitting schedule showing the numbers, types and the approved
rating of the proposed fittings.
Table 2-1 Computation of the percentage of water fittings under WELS
Ref

Water Fitting Type

WELS rating

Mandatory
Requirement
MWELS

Excellent

Very Good

Good

Remarks

Shower taps and mixers

28

30

As not all the


shower taps
and mixers are
Very Good or
Excellent
Rating, this will
not be taken
into account

Basin taps and mixers

25

10

Ok

Sink/bib taps and mixers

10

10

Ok

Dual-flush low capacity


flushing cisterns

25

10

Ok

Urinals and urinal flush


valves

30

Ok

Total no. of fitting types with Very Good or Excellent rating : 4 fitting types
Points scored

= 4 points

211

ST 2-2 WATER USAGE MONITORING

Objectives

Promote the use of sub-meters for better control and monitoring of water usage.

Applicability

Applicable to sub-metering provisions for major water uses of the station.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

2-2(a) 0.5 point can be scored if sub-meters are provided to monitor water usage
from tenants (retail shops)
2-2(b) 0.5 point can be scored if sub-meters are provided to monitor water usage
of public toilets
2-2(c) 0.5 point can be scored if sub-meters are provided to monitor water usage
of cooling towers
Extracts from the tender specification stating the provision of sub-metering for

Documentary
Evidences

the intended uses.


Schematic drawings of cold water distribution system showing the location of

the sub-metering provided.


References

212

ST 2-3 WATER CONSUMPTION OF COOLING TOWERS

Objectives

Reduce potable water consumption for cooling purpose.

Applicability

Applicable to stations with water-cooled central chillers systems, water-cooled


package units and air-cooled VRF systems.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

2-3(a) 1 point can be scored for the use of cooling tower water treatment system
which can achieve 7 or better cycles of concentration at acceptable water
quality.
2-3(b) 2 points can be scored for the use of effective drift eliminator with minimum
efficiency of 0.002 %
2-3(c) 0.5 point for the provision of NEwater or on-site recycled water from
approved sources to meet the water demand for cooling purpose.

Documentary
Evidences

For 2-3(a)
Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirements to incorporate
with the cooling tower designs to achieve seven cycles of concentration;
Details showing how the cooling towers have been designed to achieve at

least seven cycles of concentration; and


Relevant drawings showing the location of the cooling towers and other

supporting systems that are required to achieve the designed concentration.


For 2-3(b)
Extract of the tender specification and technical data of the drift eliminator to
be installed
For 2-3(c)
Extracts of the tender specification showing how the NEWater or other
recycled water source is to be provided.
References

213

(II) Other Green Requirements


Part 3 Environmental
Protection

ST 3-1
ST 3-2
ST 3-3
ST 3-4
ST 3-5
ST 3-6
ST 3-7

Sustainable Construction
Sustainable Products
Greenery Provision
Site Selection
Environmental Management Practice
Public Transport Accessibility
Refrigerants

ST 3-1 SUSTAINABLE CONSTRUCTION

Objectives

Encourage recycling and the adoption of building designs, construction practices


and materials that are environmentally friendly and sustainable.

Applicability

Applicable to the material use and construction of stations.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

3-1(a)(i) 1 point can be scored for use of Green Cements with approved
industrial by-product (such as Ground Granulated Blastfurnace Slag
(GGBS), silica fume and fly ash) to replace Ordinary Portland Cement
(OPC) by at least 10% by mass for structural works.
3-1(a)(ii) Up to 4 points can be scored for use of Recycled Concrete Aggregates
(RCA) and Washed Copper Slag (WCS) from approved sources to
replace coarse and fine aggregates for concrete production of non-load
bearing partition walls.
Points scored based on the number of applicable rooms (those with nonload bearing partition walls)
Extent of Coverage

Points Allocation
RCA

WCS

50% of rooms

80% of rooms

3-1(a)(iii) 1 point can be scored for the use of recycled concrete aggregates,
incineration bottom ash or reclaimed asphalt pavement for road
construction
3-1(a)(iv) 0.5 point can be scored for the use of eco concrete for each of the
following features (Cap at 1 point)
Road kerbs
At-grade foot paths
Road side drains
3-1(b) 1 point can be scored for the use of sustainable alternatives which can be
fabricated off-site with minimal concrete usage and wet trade for the
construction of entrance structure.
3-1(c) 1 point can be scored for the reuse of excavated soil in other sites.

215

Documentary
Evidences

For 3-1(a)(i)
Extract of tender specification showing the requirements to use Green
Cements.
Evidence of site delivery of green cements and its usage.
For 3-1(a)(ii)
Extract of tender specification showing the requirements to use RCA and WCS.
Calculation showing the quantity of RCA and WCS used.
Evidence of site delivery of these materials.
For 3-1(a)(iii)
Plan layouts showing the applicable rooms, all non-load bearing partition walls
with proper demarcation showing those walls that meet the requirement.
For 3-1(a)(iv)
Extract of tender specification showing the requirements of using these features
Plan layouts showing the location and extent of use.
Evidence of site delivery of these materials.
For 3-1(b)
Plan layouts and sectional drawing showing the type and volume of recycled
materials used for the road construction.
For 3-1(c)
Extract of tender specification or instruction of delivery of excavated soils to
specific sites.
Evidence of site delivery and receipt of these materials to other sites.

References

216

ST 3-2 SUSTAINABLE PRODUCTS

Objectives

Encourage the use of products that are environmentally friendly and sustainable.

Applicability

Applicable to non-structural and architectural related building components.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

Up to 4 points are allocated to encourage the use of appropriate environmentally


friendly products that are certified by approved local certification body. The
products used should have considerably contributions in the overall environmental
sustainability standard of the development. Points scored will be based on the
weightage, extent of coverage and impact.
The weightages given will be based on the extent of environmental friendliness as
determined by the approved local certification body and are subject to BCAs
evaluation.
Extent of Environmental
Friendliness of Products

Weightage for Points Allocation

Good

0.5

Very Good

1.5

Excellent

The use of environmental friendly products used for the main building elements or
sizable functional spaces will be considered as high impact (1 point) if the
quantities used by percentage are more than 50% (i.e. extent of coverage) as
compared to the total quantities used for the same intended purpose. Items that do
not meet the minimum coverage or are used in other common areas, external
works etc will be considered as low impact (0.5 point).
Note : The points allocated for the use of eco concrete for road kerbs, at grade footpaths
and road side drains can be found in ST 3-1 and low volatile organic compound (VOC)
paints and adhesives certified by approved local certification body can be found in ST 4-2
and hence these items shall not be included in the scoring for ST 3-2.

Documentary
Evidences

Extracts from the tender specification and drawings showing the requirements

to incorporate the environmental friendly products that are certified with


approved local certification body;
Certification details from approved local certification body such as the material

certification standards, rating and product reference; and


Technical product information and delivery records.

References

For more info on product certification, refer to


http://www.sgbc.sg/green-certifications/product-certifications/
http://www.greenlabel.sg/

217

Worked
Example
3-2(i)

1. Determine if the environmental friendly products selected are certified with


approved certification body and the product rating.
2. Check if the products used are meant for main building elements or sizable
functional spaces and determine the quantities used for these products as
compared to the total quantities required for the same intended purpose or
applicable areas. It can be considered as high impact if the quantities of the
products used constitute more than 50% of the total requirement. Examples are
internal drywall partitions in every functional space unit, finishes used for public
areas etc for more than 50% of the total quantities or applicable areas. If the
selected products are used for less than 50% of the total quantities or
applicable areas, it would be considered as low impact.
3. Products that are meant for common areas and external works such as toilets,
lobbies and landscaping areas and are adopted in more than 50% of the
applicable areas would be considered as low impact.
4.

Example of a proposed station using the following products that are rated as
Good by the approved local certification body.
Products and Extent of
coverage

(a)

Panel boards as
internal partition
for more than 50%
of office spaces
2
( 500 m )

(b)

Waterproofing for
toilet areas

With
approved
certification

Points
allocated
based on
impact

Weightage
based on
rating

Points
scored

Yes

0.5

0.5

Yes

0.5

0.5

0.25

Points scored for 3-2 (i) = 0.5+0.25 = 0.75 point


Worked
Example
3-2(ii)

Note : Certain products have more environmentally friendly features than others. Other than
recycled materials, they may have added features like low VOC assembly or manufactured
with resource efficient processes, durability etc which will render the products more
environmental friendly than others. If the certified products selected are more environmental
friendly and are rated by the approved local certification body as of better rating, a higher
weightage can be considered in point scoring.

Example of a proposed station development with the following provisions:


(a) Use of panel boards as internal partitions for more than 50% of the office spaces
and the product is rated to be Very Good by the approved certification body.
(b) Use of roof waterproofing coating. Product is rated as Excellent by approved local
certification body.
Products and Extent of
coverage

With
approved
certification

Points
allocated
based on
impact (A)

Weightage
based on
rating (B)

Points
scored
(AxB)

(a)

Panel boards as
internal partition
for more than 50%
of office spaces
(Area 500 m2)

Yes

1.5

1.5

(b)

Roof
water proofing

Yes

0.5

Points scored for 3-2 (ii) = 1.5 + 1 = 2.5 points


218

ST 3-3 GREENERY PROVISION

Objectives

Encourage greater use of greenery and restoration of existing trees to reduce heat
island effect.

Applicability

Applicable to stations with landscaping areas.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

3-3(a) Up to 2 points can be scored for the provision of greenery within the
developments including vertical greenery and green roof landscaping.
Green Plot Ratio (GnPR) is calculated by considering the 3D volume
covered by plants using the following Leaf Area Index (LAI)
Plant
group
LAI

Area

Trees

Palms

Shrubs &
Groundcover

Open Canopy = 2.5


Intermediate Canopy = 3.0
Dense Canopy = 4.0

Solitary = 2.5
Cluster = 4.0

All = 60 m2

Solitary = 20 m
Cluster = 17 m2

Turf

Monocot = 3.5
Dicot = 4.5

Turf = 2.0

Planted area

Planted
area

Green Plot Ratio (GnPR) = Total Leaf Area / Site Area


where site area is defined by a zone 5 m beyond at-grade structures excluding
areas within road reserve and neighbouring developments.
219

GnPR

Points Allocation

0.5 to < 1.0

0.5

1.0 to < 1.5

1.5 to < 2.0

1.5

2.0

3-3(b) 1 point for the use of compost recycled from horticulture waste.
Documentary
Evidences

For 3-3(a)
Plan layouts showing the site area as well as the greenery that is provided
within the development (including a listing of the number of trees, palms,
shrubs, turf and the respective sub category and LAI values);and
Calculation showing the extent of the greenery provision in the prescribed
tabulated format as in worked example 3-3(a).
For 3-3(b)
Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirements to use compost
recycled from horticulture waste.

Exceptions

TREES AND PALMS SPACING (CENTRE-TO-CENTRE)


(a) If the selected trees and palms are to be planted at 2m from trunk-to-trunk as
illustrated below, the leaf area should be calculated as the product of LAI value and
planted area (in m2).
2m

COLUMNAR TREES
(b) For trees that have tight, columnar crowns, the canopy area of 12 m2 is to be
adopted for calculation of leaf area. These species include, but not limited to the
following :
Garcinia cymosa forma pendula
Garcinia subelliptica
Polyalthia longifolia
Carallia brachiata
. Gnetum gnemon

References

The plant species, its sub categories and LAI values may be obtained from the
online website: http://florafaunaweb.nparks.gov.sg

220

Worked
Example
3-3(a)

(1) Determine the number of trees, palms and the areas for shrub and turfs and
other greenery area
(2) The Leaf Area Index (LAI) of the individual plant species and its canopy area are
predetermined design parameters applicable for all developments.
(3) The plant species sub categories and its LAI values can be obtained from the
online website: http://florafaunaweb.nparks.gov.sg (see example below) by
searching the common / scientific names of the plants.
(4) Determine the site area as defined by a zone 5 m beyond at-grade structures
excluding areas within road reserve and neighbouring developments.
(5) Compute the green areas as shown in the Table 3-3(a) below
Table 3-3(a) Calculation of the Green Plot Ratio
Category

Trees (no.)

Palms
2

Sub category

(A)

(B)

(C)

(A) x (B) x (C)

LAI
value

Canopy Area

Qty/ Planted
Area

Leaf Area

2.5

60 m2

0 no.

Intermediate
Canopy

3.0

60 m

5 no.

900

Dense Canopy

4.0

60 m2

5 no.

1200

Intermediate
columnar canopy *

3.0

12 m

4 no.

144

Solitary

2.5

20 m

6 no.

300

Open Canopy

Solitary

(no.or m )

2.5

NA

10 m

25

4.0

17 m2

0 no.

(trunk-to trunk 2m )

Cluster
2

Shrubs (m )

Monocot

3.5

Dicot
2

4.5

NA
NA

Turf (m )

Turf

2.0

NA

Vertical
Greenery (m2)

2.0

NA

Note : * refer to the exceptions

0m

20 m

90

50 m

100
0

Total Leaf Area :

2759

Note: Green roof landscaping would be calculated as per illustrated above where
applicable.
Assume site area is 4000 m2
Green Plot Ratio (GnPR) = total leaf area / site area
= 2785 / 4000 = 0.69 < 1.0
where GnPR = 0.5 to < 1.0
Therefore, points scored for 3-3(a) = 0.5 point

221

ST 3-4 SITE SELECTION

Objectives

Encourage proper site planning and selection which minimise land uptake.

Applicability

Applicable to all station developments.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

3-4 Up to 4 points can be scored based on the extent of land uptake for the
station.
Land Uptake

Points Allocation

90 % under road reserve

70% under road reserve or green field sites

50% under road reserve or green field sites

70% above central median or along road reserve

Plan layouts showing the site area, road reserve, green field sites, central

Documentary
Evidences

median and land uptake in relation to the station development.


Calculation showing the extent of the land uptake.

References

Worked
Example
3-4

Road reserve line

Proposed Underground Station

Road
reserve line

Road reserve line

Determine the land uptake (in m2) by the station development and its locality with
respect to the road reserve, green field site and central median.
As the proposed station is under the road reserve
Points scored for 3-4 = 4 points
222

ST 3-5 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PRACTICE

Objectives

Encourage the adoption of environmental friendly practices during construction and


building operation.

Applicability

Applicable to all station developments.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

3-5(a) 1 point can be scored if environmental friendly programmes (including


setting and monitoring targets to minimise energy use, water use and
construction waste) are to be effectively implemented on site.
3-5(b) 1 point can be scored if main builder has good track records in the adoption
of sustainable, environmentally friendly and considerate practices during
construction such as the Green and Gracious Builder Award.
3-5(c) Up to 1 point if the developer, main builder, M & E consultant and architect
are ISO 14000 certified. 0.25 point is allocated for each firm that is certified.
3-5(d) Up to 1 point can be scored if the project team comprises Certified Green
Mark Manager (GMM) (0.5 point) or certified Green Mark Facilities
Manager (GMFM) (0.5 point) or Certified Green Mark Professional (GMP)
(1 point).

Documentary
Evidences

For 3-5(a)
Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirements for builder to
provide and implement environmental friendly programmes to minimise
energy use, water use and construction waste; and
Details of the environmental friendly programmes implemented.
For 3-5(b)
A certified true copy of the main builders Green and Gracious Builder Award;
or
Details of track records in the adoption of sustainable, environmentally friendly
and considerate practices during construction.
For 3-5(c)
A certified true copy of the ISO 14000 certificate of developer, main
contractor, M & E consultant and architect where applicable.
For 3-5(d)
A certified true copy of the certificate of Green Mark Manager or Green Mark
Facility Manager and Green Mark Professional where applicable and a
confirmation of their involvement and contribution in the project.

References

223

ST 3-6 PUBLIC TRANSPORT ACCESSIBILITY

Objectives

Promote environmental friendly transport options and facilities to improve


accessibility to other transport nodes and neighbouring developments and reduce
pollution from individual car use.

Applicability

Applicable to all station developments.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

3-6(a) Up to 2 points can be scored based on the provision of covered links to bus
stop and extent of coverage.
Covered links to bus stops
Extent of Coverage

Points Allocation

3 or more covered links

2 covered links

1 covered link

0.5

3-6(b) Up to 1 point can be scored based on the provision of covered links to taxistands/ passengers drop off points and the extent of coverage.
Covered links to taxi-stand/
passengers drop off points
Extent of Coverage

Points Allocation

2 or more covered links


1 covered link

1
0.5

3-6(c) 3 points can be scored for the provision of covered links to nearby bus
interchange and other transit station.
3-6(d) Up to 6 points can be scored based on the provision of connections (in
numbers) to neighbouring developments with the following features :

Connections to be made available via underground or covered links


Knock out panels for future connection
Additional entrance
Connectivity to neighbouring developments

Extent of Coverage

Points Allocation

Multiple connections to each development

1.5

One connections to each development

Each knock-out panel

Each additional entrance

224

3-6(e) Up to 2 points for the provision of bicycle parking lots.


Number of bicycle parking lots

Points Allocation

20 39 lots

0.5

40 69 lots

70 99 lots

1.5

100 lots

3-6(f) Points scored will be based on the percentage of bicycle parking lots with
shelter over the total number of bicycle parking lots provided

Documentary
Evidences

Percentage of sheltered bicycle


parking lots

Points Allocation

50% of total provision

0.5

100% of total provision

For 3-6(a), (b), (c) & (d)


Site layout plan in the context of the surrounding area showing the location of

the station development site and the location of bus stops, bus interchanges,
other transit stations, taxi-stand, neighbouring development and the covered
linkways and connections.
Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirement to provide covered

walkway or connections
For 3-6(e) and (f)
Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirement to provide bicycles
parking lots (and those with shelter) and the respective quantity.
Site layout plan showing the location of these bicycle parking lots.
References

225

ST 3-7 REFRIGERANTS

Objectives

Reduce ozone depletion and global warming by minimising the release of ozone
depleting substances and greenhouses gases into the atmosphere.

Applicability

Applicable to station developments with air-conditioning systems.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

3-7(a) 1 point can be scored for the use of refrigerants with ozone depleting
potential (ODP) of zero or with global warming potential (GWP) of less
than 100.
3-7(b) 1 point can be scored for the use of refrigerant leak detection system at
critical areas of plant rooms containing chillers and other equipments with
refrigerants.

Documentary
Evidences

For 3-7(a)
Extracts from the tender specification showing the requirement for all
refrigerants to have an ODP of zero or GWP of less than 100.
For 3-7(b)
Extracts from tender specification showing the requirement to incorporate a
refrigerant leak detection system.

References

226

(II) Other Green Requirements


Part 4 Indoor
Environmental
Quality

ST 4-1
ST 4-2
ST 4-3

Thermal Comfort
Indoor Air Pollutants
Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management

227

ST 4-1 THERMAL COMFORT

Objectives

Recognise buildings that are designed with good thermal comfort.

Applicability

Applicable to station developments with air-conditioning systems.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

1 point can be scored if the air-conditioning systems are designed to allow for
cooling load variations due to fluctuations in ambient air temperature to ensure
consistent indoor conditions for thermal comfort.
Indoor temp between 24 C to 26 C
Relative Humidity < 65%

Documentary
Evidences

Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirement to design the airconditioning systems which would provide consistent indoor conditions for
thermal comfort as stated in the above requirement.

References

228

ST 4-2 INDOOR AIR POLLUTANTS

Objectives

Minimise airborne contaminants, mainly from inside sources to promote a healthy


indoor environment.

Applicability

Applicable to all station developments

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

4-2(a) 1 point can be scored for the use of low volatile organic compounds
(VOC) paints certified under approved local certification body for at least
90% of the internal wall areas.
4-2(b) 1 point can be scored for the use of adhesives certified by approved local
certification body for at least 90% of the applicable building works or areas.

Documentary
Evidences

For 4-2(a)
Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirement to use low VOC
paints that are certified by approved local certification body.

Technical product information

For 4-2(b)
Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirement to use adhesive
with low emission formaldehyde and are certified under approved local
certification body.

References

Technical product information

229

ST 4-3 INDOOR AIR QUALITY (IAQ) MANAGEMENT

Objectives

Ensure building ventilation systems are designed and installed to provide


acceptable IAQ under normal operating conditions.

Applicability

Applicable to station developments with air-conditioned systems.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

4-3(a) 1 point can be scored for the provision of filtration media and differential
pressure monitoring equipment in Air Handling Units (AHU) in accordance
with the guidelines given in SS 554: Clause 4.3.4.5 & Annex E.
4-3(b) 1 point can be scored for implementing effective IAQ management plan to
ensure that building ventilation systems are clean and free from residuals
left over from construction activities. Internal surface condition testing for
ACMV system are to be included. Refer to guidelines given in SS554:
Clause 4.6 & Annex F.

Documentary
Evidences

For 4-3(a)

Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirement of the filter media
and pressure monitoring equipment;

Technical product information which should include the minimum efficiency


reporting value (MERV) parameters of the filters; and

Technical product information of the differential pressure monitoring equipment.

For 4-3(b)

References

Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirement for builder to


provide and implement effective IAQ management and the details of the
management plan; and

Test result of the internal surface condition testing for ACMV systems

230

(II) Other Green Requirements


Part 5 Other Green
Features

ST 5-1

Green Features and Innovations

231

ST 5-1 OTHER GREEN FEATURES

Objectives

Encourage the use of green features which are innovative and have positive
environmental impact on water efficiency, environmental protection and indoor
environmental quality of the buildings.

Applicability

Generally applicable to all station developments.

Baseline
Standard

Requirements

Up to 6 points are awarded for the use of the following green features depending
on their potential environmental benefits or reduced environmental impacts.
Water Efficiency
(i) 2 points for the use of grey water recycling system
(ii) Provision of system to recycle surface runoff from the vertical green wall and
sky garden
1 point for at least 25% of the green areas
0.5 point for less than 25% of the green areas

Environmental Protection
(i) 2 points for the protection of existing greenery by using construction
methods that have minimal site disturbance such as bored/mined
construction or equivalent
(ii)

Provision of green roof and roof top garden

1 point for more than 50% of the roof areas


0.5 point for at least 25% of the roof areas

(iii) Provision of vertical greening

1 point for more than 50% of the applicable wall areas


0.5 point for at least 25% of the applicable wall areas

(iv) 0.5 point for the use of non-chemical termite treatment system.

Indoor Air Quality


0.5 point for the use of Ultraviolet light-C band (UV) emitters in all air handling units
(AHUs) to improve indoor air quality.
Others
0.5 point for the use of siphonic rainwater discharge system at roof.
Important notes : For features that are not listed above, the QP is required to submit the
details showing the positive environmental impacts, possible savings and benefits of the
proposed features to BCA for assessment before the submittal of Green Mark Score.

Documentary
Evidences

Extracts of the tender specification showing the provision of the specific green
features used and the extent of implementation where applicable;

Technical product information (including drawings and supporting documents)


of the green features;

232

Documentary
Evidences
Contd

References

A summary sheet listing the breakdown and the extent of implementation as


well as the total requirements for the same intended purpose for the specific
green features used; and

Quantified evidences on the potential environmental benefits that the features


can bring to the development.

233

Annex C
VENTILATION SIMULATION METHODOLOGY
AND REQUIREMENTS

C1

General

The natural ventilation simulation shall be carried out using computational fluid dynamics (CFD)
modeling to identify the most effective building design and layout for the development. The simulation
results and recommendations derived are to be adopted to meet the intent of the criteria.

C2

Simulation Software

The CFD modeling shall be carried out using well validated software. The CFD solver shall have the
minimum capability of solving the Navier-Stokes fluid flow equations for a three-dimensional
incompressible flow at steady state on a body conforming computational grid. Turbulence modeling
shall also be included with the minimum requirement of using the standard k- turbulence model,
coupled with standard wall function.

C3

Ventilation Simulation Methodology

C3.1 All simulation models shall be carried out under isothermal condition of 33.0C air temperature
at steady state condition.
C3.2 The computational domain shall include the development of interest, the characteristics of the
immediate surroundings and buildings reside within the proximity of minimum 3 times or more the
length of the longest distance measured across the boundary of the development. In the event that
the building and surrounding development are located within hilly terrain, the topography information
shall also be included in the simulation models. The computational domain shall be further extended
from the outer edge of the proximity regions to the boundary such that it would not result in nonphysical airflow solution, after the solution has converged. The computational domain shall also be
aligned along with the wind flow direction. The domain height shall be extended, approximately 3
times the height of the tallest building within the defined vicinity.
C3.3 The computational grid generated for all simulations should resolve the salient flow features in
the apartment units and around the development. As a guide, the dimension of the computational
element should be set at 0.1 to 0.2 m in the apartment unit, 0.5 to 1.0 m at all buildings and ground
level and 10 m at the far field boundary with a minimum of 50 m away from the ground.
C3.4 Based on local climatic wind condition, meteorological data on the precise wind direction and
velocity of the proposed site location for the month of December, March, June and September shall
be used for the CFD simulation. The prevailing wind condition such as the mean speed and direction
for Singapore shall be taken from Table C3.4 below. The inbound vertical wind profile shall assume to
be given by the Logarithmic Law with reference height at 15.0m.
Table C3.4: Tabulation of Prevailing Wind Direction & Speed obtained
from NEA over a Period of 18 Years.
Wind Direction

Mean Speed
(m/s)
2.0
2.9
2.8
3.2

North
North-East
South
South-East

C3.5 There shall have two large scale simulation models using the specified computational domain
and grid stated in paragraph C3.2 and C3.3, to assess the wind flow conditions and air-flow pattern
within the development and units. The simulation modeling can be conducted based on the two best
prevailing wind directions for the building development that is North or North-East (N or NE) and
South or South-East (S or SE).
236

Stage 1
CFD
Simulation
model for
development

Stage 2

(i)

Determine up to five (5) typical unit design layouts that have the majority number of
units. If the proposed building development comprises less than 5 typical unit types,
all the typical unit design layouts are to be selected for the simulation.

(ii)

Conduct a large scale CFD simulation to assess the wind flow conditions around
the proposed building development and adjacent buildings. Natural ventilated
corridor linked to the unit should be taken into consideration for the simulation
models.

(iii)

From the simulation results, determine the wind pressure taken at 0.5 m from every
assumed opening of all units at mid height level (capped at 20 storey height) and
the pressure difference (i.e. the difference of the maximum and minimum wind
pressure) of each unit. In instances, where all or some of the typical unit layouts
are not designed at mid-height level, the average wind pressure and respective
pressure differences should be determined for these typical units located at the
level closest to the mid-height level.

(iv)

Derive the average pressure difference of all units at mid-height or selected level.

(v)

Select the unit with pressure difference that is closest to the average pressure
difference derived in C3.5(d) from each typical unit design layout as determined in
C3.5(a) for Stage 2 simulation. The maximum allowable margin of 10% difference
from the average pressure difference is deemed acceptable.

(vi)

Conduct a large scale CFD simulation to assess the air flow conditions of these five
(5) selected units. All living or functional spaces in the unit are to be included in the
simulation modeling except for enclosed spaces such as storeroom or CD shelter.
For the simulation model, all windows and doors are assumed to be fully opened
except for the main door, which is assumed to be closed at all time.

(vii)

From the simulation results, determine the area-weighted average wind velocity of
each selected unit by considering the air flow conditions of the applicable areas.
For residential buildings, the applicable areas refer to living room, open kitchen
(that is connected to the living room), study rooms and all bedrooms. The areaweighted average wind velocities of these areas are to be computed at horizontalplane 1.2 m above the floor level. The same applies to naturally ventilated
functional spaces for non-residential buildings.

CFD
Simulation
Model for
Units

C3.6 The selected unit is deemed to have good natural ventilation if the area-weighted average wind
velocity of the unit is not less than 0.6 m/s. The overall percentage of units achieving good natural
ventilation is given by :

(No. of Selected Units for Each Layout x Area-Weighted Average Wind Velocity) x 100%
Total Number of Selected Units x 0.60 m/s

237

C4

Documentation Requirements

C4.1 The Qualified Person (QP) and the other appropriate practitioners shall ensure that the
following report is available as evidences to demonstrate compliance with the ventilation simulation
framework. The report should comprise the following items:
(i) Cover page with a proper title, photo of development, developers information (including
developers name and address and person-in-charge), Consultants detail (including the
principals name and authorized signature, firms address and person-in-charge)
(ii) Table of Contents
(iii) Executive Summary
Background of the development
Main findings
Concluding remarks
(iv) Background/ Introduction
(v) Methodology
Describe methodology used in the study
Provide the rationale for the units selection as well as salient information such as the
total no. of units and different design units layout and location
(vi) Geometrical Model should include
Isometric view of the development from various angles
Domain size used
Plan and 3D isometric model of units from various angles
(vii) Simulation settings
Boundary conditions
CFD software/ models used/ numerical scheme
Mesh / cell sizing
Solution control-convergence criteria
(viii) Result and discussions
Simulation results for development for all directions showing the main graphical plots
of the plan pressure and velocity vector and salient findings
Tabulation showing the listing and details of all typical unit types and the selected unit
types as well as the corresponding number of units and the area-weighted average
wind velocity within each selected unit where applicable.
Calculation of percentage of units with good natural ventilation and area-weighted
average wind velocity of 0.60 m/s or more.
(ix) Conclusion
(x) The following plots are to be placed in the appendices
Simulation results for the development for each direction
Static pressure (plan view-ground & mid elevation, isometric views on building
faade)
Velocity vector and contour showing the plan view at ground & mid elevation and a
few isometric sectional cut plans to show air-flow patterns across the development

Simulation results for the units for each direction


Static pressure (plan view-ground & mid elevation)
Velocity vector and contour showing the plan view at ground & mid elevation
238

Annex D
DAYLIGHTING & GLARE SIMULATION
METHODOLOGY AND REQUIREMENTS

D1

General

The daylighting and glare simulation shall be carried out using computational modeling to quantify the
availability of natural daylighting to effectively replace the use of artificial lightings, while maintaining
proper and comfortable lighting level. The simulation results and recommendations derived are to be
adopted to meet the intent of the criteria.

D2

Simulation Software

The computational modeling shall be carried out using well documented software that has the
capability to take into consideration the direct sky component, externally reflected component,
internally reflected component and multiple light reflections as detailed in the following table :
Component
Direct Sky

Externally Reflected

Internally Reflected

Multiple Light
Reflections

D3

Parameters
Relative direct illuminance and angle of that particular sky
Visible transmittance of each glazing material through which daylight
travels
Reflectance of materials assigned to all external objects, such as
ground and other buildings
Relative surface angle of materials and glazing transmittances
Reflectance of materials assigned to all interior objects, such as walls,
doors, ceilings and partitions
Relative surface angle of materials
Inter-reflections of light off multiple surfaces
Relative surface angle of materials

Daylighting and Glare Simulation Methodology

D3.1 The computational domain of all simulations shall include the development of interest, the
characteristics of the immediate surroundings and buildings at a large scale level.
D3.2 All storey levels of each building tower together with the all interior design layout (such as
walls and partitions) and properties of materials used are to be considered in the simulation. The
reflectance value of materials used shall be based on the following:
Materials

Reflectance Value

Wall

Brick plaster

0.70

Partition

Plasterboard

0.70

Floor

Concrete tiles

0.40

Concrete plaster

0.70

Carpeted

0.20

White paint finishing

0.80

Roof

Clay tiled roof

0.10

Railing

Stainless steel

0.85

Glass

Clear glass

0.70

Paving blocks

0.30

Asphalt pavement

0.10

Swimming pool water

0.90

Grass

0.20

Ceiling

External

240

D3.3 All simulations shall be carried out based on the local meteorological data of the proposed site
location and on the selected date 22nd for the month of December, March, June and September.
(i) Simulation model for daylighting analysis: To assess the distribution of effective daylighting
across the depth of room under Overcast sky condition, at 1300 hrs. The computational grid
generated shall be at the height of working desk level, approximately 0.7m off the ground. The
illuminance colour scale should be set in the range of 0 lux to 500 lux, with an interval of 50
lux.
(ii) Simulation model for glare analysis: To assess the comfortability of occupants glare exposure
under Sunny sky condition, at 1000 hrs and 1600 hrs. At least one computational viewpoint
should be considered for each building faade orientation; all viewpoint locations shall be
determined through Sunpath analysis to capture the worst-case scenarios. The computational
viewpoints generated shall consider measurements both vertically and horizontally, of at least
120 degrees measured from the centre of each viewpoint. The viewpoints should be placed at
the height of human eye level when seated, approximately 1.25m off the ground.
D3.4

Computation on qualifying units:


The percentage of units achieving effective daylighting is given by:
Units achieving minimum required illuminance level

X 100%

Total number of units

D4

Documentation Requirements

D4.1 The Qualified Person (QP) and the other appropriate practitioners shall ensure that the
following report is available as evidence to demonstrate compliance with the daylighting and glare
simulation framework. The report should comprise the following items:
(i) Cover page with a proper title, photo of development, developers information (including
developers name and address and person-in-charge), and Consultants details (including the
principals name and authorized signature, firms address and person-in-charge).
(ii) Table of Contents
(iii) Executive Summary
Background of the development
Main findings
Concluding remarks
(iv) Background/ Introduction
(v) Methodology
Describe methodology used in the study
Provide rationale for the selection of viewpoint locations for glare analysis, as well as
salient information such as different design room layout
(vi) Geometrical Model should include
Isometric view of the development from various angles
Domain size used
Plan and 3D isometric model of different storey from various angles
241

(vii) Simulation settings


Boundary conditions and meteorological data used
Simulation software/ models used/ numerical scheme
Mesh/ grid sizing
Inputs of materials properties, such as Visible Light Transmittance (VLT) value of
glazing and reflectance value of all materials
Computational grid and viewpoint locations for the analyses
(viii) Results and discussions
Simulation results for the whole development showing the main graphical plots of the
illuminance level and glare exposure distribution across the room depth
Recommendations on the provision and locations of photo sensors to control the
usage of electrical lightings in the presence of effective daylighting
Recommendations on measures to minimise unfavourable glare conditions (if any)
(ix) Conclusion
(x) The following documentations are to be placed in the appendices
Daylighting simulation results (done for each analysis)
Technical product information on material properties used such as Visible Light
Transmittance (VLT) value of glazing and reflectance value of all materials
Plan and 3D isometric model diagrams showing the distribution of illuminance level
across the room depth in false colours
Tabulation of illuminance data for all areas
Tabulation of illuminance data for areas achieving minimum required illuminance
level as well as the calculation showing the percentage of area compliance

Glare simulation results (done for each analysis)

Technical product information on material properties used such as Visible Light


Transmittance (VLT) value of glazing and reflectance value of all materials
Model diagrams illustrated in contours showing the distribution of Unified Glare
Rating (UGR) across each viewpoint
Tabulation of UGR data for all viewpoints
Tabulation of UGR data for areas achieving acceptable glare exposure as well as
the calculation showing the percentage of area compliance

242

You might also like